NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual PDF NEC
NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual
NEC NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual NEC_NEAX2400_IMX_Circuit_Card_Manual www.TelecomUserGuides.com Access User Guides, Manuals and Brochures
User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 343
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
ND-70182 (E) ISSUE 4 STOCK # 200866 ® Circuit Card Manual MAY, 2000 NEC America, Inc. LIABILITY DISCLAIMER NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or features, at any time, without notice. NEC America, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC America, Inc. and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC America, Inc. NEAX and Dterm are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation. Copyright 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 NEC America, Inc. Printed in U.S.A. Issue No. PAGE No. 4 Issue No. PAGE No. 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 i 1 2 3 4 31 ii 1 2 3 4 32 1 iii 1 2 3 4 33 1 1 1 iv 1 2 3 4 34 v 1 2 3 4 35 vi 1 2 3 4 36 1 2 3 4 vii 1 2 3 4 37 1 2 3 4 viii 1 2 3 4 38 1 2 3 4 1 1 2 3 4 39 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 2 1 2 3 4 40 3 1 2 3 4 41 1 2 3 4 4 1 2 3 4 42 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 43 1 2 3 4 6 1 2 3 4 44 1 2 3 4 7 1 2 3 4 45 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 8 1 2 3 4 46 9 1 2 3 4 47 10 1 2 3 4 48 1 2 3 4 11 1 2 3 4 49 1 2 3 4 12 1 2 3 4 50 1 2 3 4 13 1 2 3 4 51 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 14 1 2 3 4 52 15 1 2 3 4 53 1 2 3 4 16 1 2 3 4 54 1 2 3 4 17 1 2 3 4 55 1 2 3 4 18 1 2 3 4 56 1 2 3 4 19 1 2 3 4 57 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 20 1 2 3 4 58 21 1 2 3 4 59 22 1 2 3 4 60 1 2 3 4 23 1 2 3 4 61 1 2 3 4 24 1 2 3 4 62 1 2 3 4 25 1 2 3 4 63 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 26 1 2 3 4 64 27 1 2 3 4 65 1 2 3 4 28 1 2 3 4 66 1 2 3 4 29 1 2 3 4 67 1 2 3 4 30 1 2 3 4 68 1 2 3 4 ISSUE 1 DATE NOVEMBER, 1997 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 5 DATE NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual JULY, 1998 ISSUE 3 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 4 APRIL, 1999 6 7 ISSUE 4 DATE ISSUE 7 DATE 5 MAY, 2000 ISSUE 8 DATE Issue Revision Sheet 1/5 ND-70182 (E) ISSUE 4 Issue No. PAGE No. 4 Issue No. PAGE No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 69 1 2 3 4 70 1 2 3 4 108 1 71 1 2 3 4 109 1 72 1 2 3 4 110 1 73 1 2 3 4 111 1 74 1 2 3 4 112 1 75 1 2 3 4 113 1 107 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 2 3 4 76 1 2 3 4 114 1 2 3 4 77 1 2 3 4 115 1 2 3 4 78 1 2 3 4 116 1 2 3 4 79 1 2 3 4 117 1 2 3 4 80 1 2 3 4 118 1 2 3 4 81 1 2 3 4 119 1 2 3 4 82 1 2 3 4 120 1 2 3 4 83 1 2 3 4 121 1 2 3 4 84 1 2 3 4 122 1 2 3 4 85 1 2 3 4 123 1 2 3 4 86 1 2 3 4 124 1 2 3 4 87 1 2 3 4 125 1 2 3 4 88 1 2 3 4 126 1 2 3 4 89 1 2 3 4 127 1 2 3 4 90 1 2 3 4 128 1 2 3 4 91 1 2 3 4 129 1 3 4 92 1 2 3 4 130 1 3 4 93 1 2 3 4 131 1 3 4 94 1 2 3 4 132 1 3 4 95 1 2 3 4 133 1 3 4 96 1 2 3 4 134 1 3 4 97 1 2 3 4 135 1 3 4 98 1 2 3 4 136 1 3 4 99 1 2 3 4 137 1 3 4 100 1 2 3 4 138 1 3 4 101 1 2 3 4 139 1 3 4 102 1 2 3 4 140 1 3 4 103 1 2 3 4 141 1 3 4 104 1 2 3 4 142 1 3 4 105 1 2 3 4 143 1 3 4 106 1 2 3 4 144 1 3 4 ISSUE 1 DATE NOVEMBER, 1997 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 5 DATE NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual JULY, 1998 ISSUE 3 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 4 APRIL, 1999 6 7 ISSUE 4 DATE ISSUE 7 DATE 5 MAY, 2000 ISSUE 8 DATE Issue Revision Sheet 2/5 ND-70182 (E) ISSUE 4 Issue No. PAGE No. 1 2 3 4 4 Issue No. PAGE No. 5 6 7 1 2 183 3 4 3 4 145 1 3 4 146 1 3 4 184 3 4 147 1 3 4 185 3 4 148 1 3 4 186 3 4 149 3 4 187 3 4 150 3 4 188 3 4 151 3 4 189 3 4 152 3 4 190 3 4 153 3 4 191 3 4 154 3 4 192 3 4 155 3 4 193 3 4 156 3 4 194 3 4 157 3 4 195 3 4 158 3 4 196 3 4 159 3 4 197 3 4 160 3 4 198 3 4 161 3 4 199 3 4 162 3 4 200 3 4 163 3 4 201 3 4 164 3 4 202 3 4 165 3 4 203 3 4 166 3 4 204 3 4 167 3 4 205 3 4 168 3 4 206 3 4 169 3 4 207 3 4 170 3 4 208 3 4 171 3 4 209 3 4 172 3 4 210 3 4 173 3 4 211 3 4 174 3 4 212 3 4 175 3 4 213 3 4 176 3 4 214 3 4 177 3 4 215 3 4 178 3 4 216 3 4 179 3 4 217 3 4 180 3 4 218 3 4 181 3 4 219 3 4 182 3 4 220 3 4 ISSUE 1 DATE NOVEMBER, 1997 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 5 DATE NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual JULY, 1998 ISSUE 3 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 4 APRIL, 1999 6 7 ISSUE 4 DATE ISSUE 7 DATE 5 MAY, 2000 ISSUE 8 DATE Issue Revision Sheet 3/5 ND-70182 (E) ISSUE 4 Issue No. PAGE No. 3 4 221 3 4 222 3 4 223 3 4 224 3 4 225 3 4 226 3 4 227 3 4 1 2 4 Issue No. PAGE No. 5 6 7 3 4 3 4 260 3 4 261 3 4 262 3 4 263 3 4 264 3 4 265 3 4 1 2 259 228 3 4 266 3 4 229 3 4 267 3 4 230 3 4 268 3 4 231 3 4 269 3 4 3 4 232 3 4 270 233 3 4 271 4 234 3 4 272 4 235 3 4 273 4 236 3 4 274 4 237 3 4 275 4 238 3 4 276 4 239 3 4 277 4 240 3 4 278 4 241 3 4 279 4 242 3 4 280 4 243 3 4 281 4 244 3 4 282 4 245 3 4 283 4 246 3 4 284 4 247 3 4 285 4 248 3 4 286 4 249 3 4 287 4 250 3 4 288 4 251 3 4 289 4 252 3 4 290 4 253 3 4 291 4 254 3 4 292 4 255 3 4 293 4 256 3 4 294 4 257 3 4 295 4 258 3 4 296 4 ISSUE 1 DATE NOVEMBER, 1997 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 5 DATE NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual JULY, 1998 ISSUE 3 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE 4 APRIL, 1999 6 7 ISSUE 4 DATE ISSUE 7 DATE 5 MAY, 2000 ISSUE 8 DATE Issue Revision Sheet 4/5 ND-70182 (E) ISSUE 4 Issue No. PAGE No. 1 2 3 4 297 4 298 4 299 4 300 4 301 4 302 4 303 4 304 4 305 4 306 4 307 4 308 4 309 4 310 4 311 4 312 4 313 4 314 4 315 4 316 4 317 4 318 4 319 4 320 4 321 4 322 4 323 4 324 4 325 4 326 4 327 4 328 4 ISSUE 1 DATE NOVEMBER, 1997 NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual 5 6 7 1 ISSUE 2 DATE ISSUE 5 DATE 4 JULY, 1998 2 3 4 4 ISSUE 3 DATE ISSUE 6 DATE Issue No. PAGE No. APRIL, 1999 6 7 ISSUE 4 DATE ISSUE 7 DATE 5 MAY, 2000 ISSUE 8 DATE Issue Revision Sheet 5/5 ND-70182 (E) ISSUE 4 ND-70182 (E) ISSUE 4 MAY, 2000 NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card Manual TABLE OF CONTENTS Page CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2. Mounting Location of Circuit Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1 2 CHAPTER 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SN1374 CPRP-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SN1401 CPRAC-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PH-GT09 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PH-GT10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-PC94 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-PW54-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-PW54-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-PW55-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-PW55-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PH-IO24 ........................................................................ PH-M22 ........................................................................ PH-M16/PH-M23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PH-PC36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PH-PC20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PH-PC40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PH-PW14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PH-SW10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PH-SW12 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PU-SW00 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PU-SW01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PZ-GT13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PZ-GT16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PZ-GT20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PZ-PC19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 14 22 28 31 39 42 46 51 56 61 66 71 76 81 90 93 100 103 115 122 127 132 135 138 141 CHAPTER 3 LINE/TRUNK CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-CFTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-CK14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PH-CK16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PH-CK16-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PH-CK17 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PH-CK17-A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PH-CK18 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-CS08 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 145 146 152 155 166 182 193 208 213 ND-70182 (E) TABLE OF CONTENTS Page i Revision 4.0 TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED) PA-CS33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-16LCBW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-16LCBY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-16ELCJ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-16ELCJ-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-24LCBV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-FCHA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-M96 ........................................................................ PA-8RSTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-8RSTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-SDTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-SDTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TABLE OF CONTENTS Page ii Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) Page 219 231 241 250 257 266 279 289 295 302 311 324 LIST OF FIGURES Figure Title Page Figure 1-1 Figure 1-2 Figure 1-3 Figure 2-1 Figure 2-2 Figure 2-3 Figure 2-4 Figure 2-5 Figure 2-6 Figure 2-7 Figure 2-8 Figure 2-9 Figure 2-10 Figure 2-11 Figure 2-12 Figure 2-13 Figure 2-14 Figure 2-15 Figure 2-16 Figure 2-17 Figure 2-18 Figure 2-19 Figure 2-20 Figure 2-21 Figure 2-22 Figure 2-23 Figure 2-24 Figure 2-25 Figure 2-26 Figure 2-27 Figure 2-28 Figure 2-29 Figure 2-30 Figure 2-31 Figure 2-32 Figure 2-33 Figure 2-34 Figure 2-35 Figure 2-36 Figure 2-37 Figure 2-38 Figure 2-39 Figure 2-40 Figure 2-41 Figure 2-42 Figure 2-43 Figure 2-44 Figure 2-45 Card Mounting Slot for the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (1/4) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Card Mounting Slot for the IMX-U System (1/5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of SN1374 CPRP-A (CPR) in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPR Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front View of CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of SN1401 CPRAC-A (CPR) in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPR Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front View of CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-GT09 (GT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-GT09 (GT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A (CPR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CPR Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front View of CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-GT10 (IOGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-PC94 (DLMX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PA-PC94 (DLMX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-PW55-A (PWR) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PA-PW55-A Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-PW55-B (PWR) Card Within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PA-PW55-B Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Cable Connection for PH-IO24 (IOC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-M22 (MMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-M22 (MMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-M16/PH-M23 (LTST) Card Within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-M16/PH-M23 (LTST) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 4 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the IMX-U System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PCM Highway Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-PC36 (MUX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External Interface for PH-PC36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connections between the MUX and the TSW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PC-PH20 in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of the PH-PC20 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-PC40 (EMA) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of the PH-PC40 (EMA) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel and Music on Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . -48 V Output Circuit Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ND-70182 (E) 3 4 8 14 15 16 22 23 24 28 29 31 32 33 39 40 42 44 46 48 51 53 56 58 61 63 66 67 69 71 72 74 76 77 79 81 82 83 84 85 87 88 90 91 93 94 98 100 LIST OF FIGURES Page iii Revision 4.0 LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED) Figure Title Figure 2-46 Figure 2-47 Figure 2-48 Figure 2-49 Figure 2-50 Figure 2-51 Figure 2-52 Figure 2-53 Figure 2-54 Figure 2-55 Figure 2-56 Figure 2-57 Figure 2-58 Figure 2-59 Figure 2-60 Figure 2-61 Figure 2-62 Figure 2-63 Figure 2-64 Figure 2-65 Figure 2-66 Figure 2-67 Figure 2-68 Figure 2-69 Figure 2-70 Figure 2-71 Figure 3-1 Figure 3-2 Figure 3-3 Figure 3-4 Figure 3-5 Figure 3-6 Figure 3-7 Figure 3-8 Figure 3-9 Figure 3-10 Figure 3-11 Figure 3-12 Figure 3-13 Figure 3-14 Face Layout of the PH-PW14 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-SW10 (TSW) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLO Function Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice Prompting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-SW10 (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLO Connector Leads Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front Cable Connections for PH-SW10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TSW Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Music/Tone Insertion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Speech Path Memory (SPM) for Voice Prompt Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-SW12 (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PU-SW00 (TSW) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PU-SW00 (TSW) (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PU-SW00 (TSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PU-SW01 (HSW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) in the IMX-U System (ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PZ-PC19 (LANI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PZ-PC19 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-CFTB (CFT) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PA-CFTB (CFT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-CK16 (PLO) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Music Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-CK16 (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-CK16-A (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISW) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection Diagram (ISW) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an External High-Stability Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection Diagram (ISW) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISW-LN0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . Connection of External Music-On-Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-CK17 (PLO) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Music Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-CK17 (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-15 Figure 3-16 Figure 3-17 Figure 3-18 Figure 3-19 Figure 3-20 Figure 3-21 Figure 3-22 LIST OF FIGURES Page iv Revision 4.0 Page ND-70182 (E) 101 103 104 105 106 111 112 113 115 116 117 119 122 123 124 127 129 132 133 134 135 137 138 139 141 142 146 148 152 153 155 157 158 163 164 167 169 174 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 184 185 190 LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED) Figure Title Figure 3-23 Figure 3-24 Figure 3-25 Figure 3-26 Figure 3-27 Figure 3-28 Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-CK17-A (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-CK17-A (PLO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISW) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection (ISW) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an External Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection Diagram (ISW) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISW-LN0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection of External Music-On-Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PH-CK18 (CLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PH-CK18 (CLK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (ISW-LN0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-CS08-B (HMATI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of HMATI Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-CS33 (ATI) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PA-CS33 (ATI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Desk Console Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Distance between PBX and Modular Rosette of Desk Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-16LCBW (LC) within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PA-16LCBW (LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-16LCBY(LC) Circuit card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PA-16LCBY(LC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (PIM) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (8DLC Mode) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-24LCBV(LC) Card within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PA-24LCBV(LC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation (PIM) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LC Connector Lead Accommodation (LC Cable) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24LCBV (LC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outer View of LC Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Running of LC Cable (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Figure 3-29 Figure 3-30 Figure 3-31 Figure 3-32 Figure 3-33 Figure 3-34 Figure 3-35 Figure 3-36 Figure 3-37 Figure 3-38 Figure 3-39 Figure 3-40 Figure 3-41 Figure 3-42 Figure 3-43 Figure 3-44 Figure 3-45 Figure 3-46 Figure 3-47 Figure 3-48 Figure 3-49 Figure 3-50 Figure 3-51 Figure 3-52 Figure 3-53 Figure 3-54 Figure 3-55 Figure 3-56 Figure 3-57 Figure 3-58 Figure 3-59 Figure 3-60 Figure 3-61 Figure 3-62 Figure 3-63 Figure 3-64 Figure 3-65 Figure 3-66 Figure 3-67 Figure 3-68 Figure 3-69 Page ND-70182 (E) 191 193 195 200 202 203 204 205 206 207 209 210 212 213 214 217 219 220 224 225 226 227 229 231 232 238 240 241 242 247 249 250 251 254 255 257 258 262 264 266 267 273 275 276 277 278 279 LIST OF FIGURES Page v Revision 4.0 LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED) Figure Title Figure 3-70 Figure 3-71 Figure 3-72 Figure 3-73 Figure 3-74 Figure 3-75 Figure 3-76 Figure 3-77 Figure 3-78 Figure 3-79 Figure 3-80 Figure 3-81 Figure 3-82 Figure 3-83 Figure 3-84 Figure 3-85 Figure 3-86 Figure 3-87 Figure 3-88 Face Layout of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FCH/HUB/DTI Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FCH Cascade Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-M96 (HUB) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PA-M96 (HUB) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of the PA-8RSTM Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-8RSTY (RST) Within the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PA-8RSTY (RST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-SDTA (SDT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PA-SDTA Card Mounted in the 1 IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PA-SDTA (SDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cable Connection between PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LT Connector Lead Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of Cable Connection for 1-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example of Cable Connection for 4-IMG System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of MUXxxx Connectors for SDT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Location of PA-SDTB (SDT) Card in the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Face Layout of PA-SDTB (SDT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LIST OF FIGURES Page vi Revision 4.0 Page ND-70182 (E) 280 286 287 289 290 295 302 303 311 313 314 316 317 318 320 321 322 324 326 LIST OF TABLES Table Title Page Table 3-1 Table 3-2 Table 3-3 Table 3-4 Table 3-5 Table 3-6 Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relationship between SW01-1 and SW01-7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type of 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relationship between Cable Connection and Time Slot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Level Margin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ND-70182 (E) 250 253 257 319 319 322 LIST OF TABLES Page vii Revision 4.0 This page is for your notes. LIST OF TABLES Page viii Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1. General This manual provides the circuit card description for the NEAX2400 IMX system. This manual is for those persons who are involved in the system setup and administration activities for the NEAX2400 IMX. For each circuit card the following items are explained: • General function • Slot to mount the circuit card • Precautions for mounting the card • Location of the electronic devices on the card surface • Description of the LED • Description of the switches • Physical interface The circuit cards explained in this manual are divided into two categories, the Control Circuit Cards and the Line/Trunk Circuit Cards. You can easily define the card category by the pull tab color of the circuit card. • Control Circuit Card White or red pull tab circuit cards are categorized as control circuit card. Also, the circuit cards in the Central Processor Rack (CPR) have white or red pull tabs. • Line/Trunk Circuit Card Blue or yellow pull tab circuit cards are categorized as line/trunk circuit cards. Note: This manual is intended to describe only the basic line/trunk interface circuit cards of the NEAX2400 IMX. When you use circuit cards not shown in this manual, you may refer to the NEAX2400 ICS Circuit Card Manual with the following changes: • The line/trunk circuit card shown in the above mentioned manual is compatible with NEAX2400 IMX; however, the exceptions are PA-CS02-C (2AT1) and PA-CS08B (H/MATI). • The external appearance of PIM U (which is the standard port interface module of NEAX2400 IMX) is the same as the PIM J of the NEAX2400 ICS. • The PCM highway running in PIM is different. More details are explained in this manual’s section on PH-PC36 (MUX). ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 1 Page 1 Revision 4.0 INTRODUCTION Mounting Location of Circuit Card 2. Mounting Location of Circuit Card The control circuit cards for the 1 IMG system should be mounted in their dedicated slots, as shown in Figure 1-1. The control circuit cards for the 4 IMG system should be mounted in their dedicated slots, as shown in Figure 1-2 through Figure 1-2. The control circuit cards for the IMX-U system should be mounted in their dedicated slots as shown in Figure 1-3 through Figure 1-3. As a general rule, the blue pull tab line/trunk circuit cards are mounted in the universal slots that are located in Slots 04 - 12 and 15 - 23 of the Port Interface Module (PIM). The yellow pull tab line/trunk circuit cards (MISC) are mounted in Slots 00 - 02 of the LPM. Additional GT/LANI cards are mounted in the CPR. CHAPTER 1 Page 2 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) INTRODUCTION Mounting Location of Circuit Card 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(DPWR) PA-PW55-A(PWR) PIM3 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(DPWR) PA-PW55-A(PWR) PIM2 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(DPWR) PA-PW55-A(PWR) PIM1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-SW10(TSW) PH-SW10(TSW) PA-PW54-A(DPWR) PA-PW55-A(PWR) PIM0 BSCM 00 01 02 03 04 PH-IO24(IOC) PH-PC40(EMA) (IOC/MISC) (MISC) (MISC) LPM Figure 1-1 Card Mounting Slot for the 1 IMG System ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 1 Page 3 Revision 4.0 INTRODUCTION Mounting Location of Circuit Card NEAX2400IMS(IMX) 4IMG-SYSTEM B S C M IMG0 PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM LPM TSWM Dummy/APM Dummy/APM IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM3 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM2 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) BSCM PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM0 00 01 02 03 04 PH-IO24(IOC) PH-PC40(EMA) (IOC/MISC) (MISC) (MISC) LPM Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (1/4) CHAPTER 1 Page 4 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) INTRODUCTION Mounting Location of Circuit Card NEAX2400IMS(IMX) 4IMG-SYSTEM B S C M IMG1 PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM LPM TSWM Dummy/APM Dummy/APM IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM3 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM2 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM0 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-CK16/17(PLO1) PH-CK16/17(PLO0) PH-SW12(TDSW13) PH-SW12(TDSW12) PH-SW12(TDSW11) PH-SW12(TDSW10) PH-SW12(TDSW03) PH-SW12(TDSW02) PH-SW12(TDSW01) PH-SW12(TDSW00) PH-GT09(GT1) PH-GT09(GT0) PH-PC20(DLKC1) PH-PC20(DLKC0) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) PH-PW14(PWRSW) PH-PW14(PWRSW) TSWM Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (2/4) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 1 Page 5 Revision 4.0 INTRODUCTION Mounting Location of Circuit Card NEAX2400IMS(IMX) 4IMG-SYSTEM B S C M IMG2 PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM LPM TSWM Dummy/APM Dummy/APM IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM3 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM2 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM0 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Dummy/APM Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (3/4) CHAPTER 1 Page 6 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) INTRODUCTION Mounting Location of Circuit Card NEAX2400IMS(IMX) 4IMG-SYSTEM B S C M IMG3 PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM LPM TSWM Dummy/APM Dummy/APM IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM3 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM2 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM0 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Dummy/APM Figure 1-2 Card Mounting Slot for the 4 IMG System (4/4) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 1 Page 7 Revision 4.0 INTRODUCTION Mounting Location of Circuit Card PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM LPM LPM TSWM0 TSWM1 Dummy ISW IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 ISWM PWR(PZ-PW106) LANI(PZ-PC19) ISAGT(PZ-GT13) LANI(PZ-PC19) PWR(PZ-PW106) LANI(PZ-PC19) ISAGT(PZ-GT13) Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IMX-U System (1/5) HSW11 (PU-SW01)(RES) HSW10 (PU-SW01) TSW13 (PU-SW00) TSW12 (PU-SW00) TSW11 (PU-SW00) LANI(PZ-PC19) LANI(PZ-PC19) Note IOC(PH-IO24) EMA(PH-PC40) LANI(PZ-PC19) O TSW10 (PU-SW00) PLO1 (PH-CK16-A/17-A) IOGT1 (PH-GT10) IOGT0 (PH-GT10) PLO0 (PH-CK16-A/17-A) TSW03 (PU-SW00) TSW02 (PU-SW00) TSW01 (PU-SW00) TSW00 (PU-SW00) HSW01 (PU-SW01) HSW00 (PU-SW01)(RES) I MMC(PH-M22) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 1 Page 8 Revision 4.0 PWR1 (PH-PW14) The 2nd IOC card (optional) may be mounted in the slot. Note: PIM PIM IMX-U SYSTEM DSP PWR FDD/HDD BASEU I 00 01 02 03 04 O LPN PWR0 (PH-PW14) ISWM PIM PIM ISW PIM NEAX2400IMX LN 4 (0 3) ISW TOPU 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 INTRODUCTION Mounting Location of Circuit Card PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM ISWM PIM PIM PIM PIM LPM LPM TSWM0 TSWM1 Dummy ISW IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 NEAX2400IMX IMX-U SYSTEM IMG0 LN 4 (0 3) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PA-PW54-A (PWR1) PA-PW55-A (PWR0) PIM3 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PA-PW54-A (PWR1) PA-PW55-A (PWR0) PIM2 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PA-PW54-A (PWR1) PA-PW55-A (PWR0) PIM1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PA-PW54-A (PWR1) PA-PW55-A (PWR0) PIM0 00 01 02 03 04 BSCM PH-PC40(EMA) (IOC/MISC) PH-IO24(IOC) (MISC) PH-M22(MMC) LPM Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IMX-U System (2/5) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 1 Page 9 Revision 4.0 INTRODUCTION Mounting Location of Circuit Card PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM LPM LPM TSWM0 TSWM1 Dummy ISW IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 NEAX2400IMX IMX-U SYSTEM ISWM IMG1 LN 4 (0 3) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PA-PW54-A (PWR1) PA-PW55-A (PWR0) PIM3 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PA-PW54-A (PWR1) PA-PW55-A (PWR0) PIM2 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PA-PW54-A (PWR1) PA-PW55-A (PWR0) PIM1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36 (MUX) PH-PC36 (MUX) PA-PW54-A (PWR1) PA-PW55-A (PWR0) PIM0 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO1) PH-CK16-A/17-A (PLO0) PH-SW12 (TSW13) PH-SW12 (TSW12) PH-SW12 (TSW11) PH-SW12 (TSW10) PH-SW12 (TSW03) PH-SW12 (TSW02) PH-SW12 (TSW01) PH-SW12 (TSW00) PH-GT09 (GT1) PH-GT09 (GT0) PH-PC20 (DLKC1) PH-PC20 (DLKC0) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) (MISC) PH-PW14 (PWRSW) PH-PW14 (PWRSW) TSWM0 Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IMX-U System (3/5) CHAPTER 1 Page 10 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) INTRODUCTION Mounting Location of Circuit Card NEAX2400IMX IMX-U SYSTEM IMG2 PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM ISWM PIM PIM PIM PIM LPM LPM TSWM0 TSWM1 Dummy ISW IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 LN 4 (0 3) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM3 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM2 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM0 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-CK18 (CLK1) PH-CK18 (CLK0) PH-SW12 (TSW13) PH-SW12 (TSW12) PH-SW12 (TSW11) PH-SW12 (TSW10) PH-SW12 (TSW03) PH-SW12 (TSW02) PH-SW12 (TSW01) PH-SW12 (TSW00) PH-GT09 (GT1) PH-GT09 (GT0) PH-PW14 (PWRSW1) PH-PW14 (PWRSW0) TSWM1 Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IMX-U System (4/5) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 1 Page 11 Revision 4.0 INTRODUCTION Mounting Location of Circuit Card NEAX2400IMX IMX-U SYSTEM IMG3 PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM PIM ISWM PIM PIM PIM PIM LPM LPM TSWM0 TSWM1 Dummy ISW IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 LN 4 (0 3) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM3 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM2 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM1 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PA-PW54-A(PWR1) PA-PW55-A(PWR0) PIM0 Dummy Figure 1-3 Card Mounting Slot for the IMX-U System (5/5) CHAPTER 1 Page 12 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 CONTROL CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE This chapter explains the following items for each Control Circuit Card. • General Function Explains the general function and purpose of each control circuit card. • Mounting Location/Condition Explains the mounting location (mounting module name and slot number, etc.) for each circuit card. If there are any conditions pertaining to mounting the circuit cards, they are also explained. • Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The locations of the lamps, switches, and connectors provided on each circuit card are illustrated by a face layout. • Lamp Indications The names, colors, and indication states of lamps mounted on each circuit card are listed. • Switch Settings Each circuit card's switches are listed with their names, switch numbers, their setting and its meaning, standard setting, etc. • External Interface If the lead outputs of the circuit card are provided by an LT connector, the relation between the mounting slots and the LT connectors is illustrated by an LT Connector Lead Face Layout. If the lead outputs are provided by other than an LT connector, or are provided by the circuit card front connector, the connector lead locations and the connecting routes are shown. In addition, a Switch Setting Sheet, which may be used to record the switch settings, is provided at the end of the explanation for each circuit card. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 13 Revision 4.0 SN1374 CPRP-A CPU Board SN1374 CPRP-A CPU Board 1. General Function The Central Processing Rack (CPR) consists of the following components. (a) CPU BOARD: Contains the Main Processor Unit (MPU), ROM, and 128 Mbyte of Random Access Memory (RAM). Also, this board may be equipped with the ISAGT (PZ-GT16) on its Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) and LANI (PZ-PC19) on the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI). (b) DSP: Contains the CPR switches and the CPR status indicator lamps. (c) FDD/HDD: Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Hard Disk Drive (HDD) are mounted on a circuit card, which can be extracted and/or inserted while the system is in operation, if required. (d) PWR: Supplies the operating power to the CPR, and also the MISC slots of the LPM. To I/O local bus DSP To HUB LANI To HUB LANI CPU DSP ISAGT ISAGT CPU CPR#1 CPR#0 LANI To HUB LANI To HUB To MISC bus Figure 2-1 Location of SN1374 CPRP-A (CPR) in the System CHAPTER 2 Page 14 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) SN1374 CPRP-A CPU Board 2. Mounting Location/Condition The CPR is composed of a CPU BOARD, DSP, FDD/HDD and PWR, and is located in the Local Processor Module (LPM) as shown below. Since the CPR provides the Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) bus and Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, the GT and LANI cards are located in those busses respectively. Mounting Module LPM PIM0 BSCM LPM PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) CPR PZ-PC19 (LANI) PZ-PW92 (PWR) PT-2200 (CPU BOARD) PZ-DK224 (DSP) PZ-IO27(FDD/HDD) Figure 2-2 CPR Location ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 15 Revision 4.0 SN1374 CPRP-A CPU Board 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors The CPR has the following lamps, switches and connectors. Slot numbers 0-3 provide the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, and slot numbers 4-6 are the Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus. PWR (PZ-PW92) FDD/HDD (PZ-IO27) DSP (PZ-DK224) PZ-PW92 DC-40V~-58.6V A B HDD SW I ON MBR O -48V OUT ON OFF GT1 SYSTEM SELECT0 5A 125V AC/DC GT3 STATUS 4 SYSTEM SELECT1 PALM SENSE ON 1 12 SYSTEM SELECT2 ON 13 INPWR GT2 GT0 ON 1 OUTPWR CPU OPE WDT CPURST 20 ON ALM SLOT NO. 0 1 Figure 2-3 Front View of CPR CHAPTER 2 Page 16 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) 2 3 4 5 6 SN1374 CPRP-A CPU Board 4. Lamp Indications LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION ON (PWR) Green Lights green when the PWR is supplied. ALM (PWR) Red Lights red when the PWR is abnormal. HDD (HDD) Red Lights red while the HDD is being accessed. WDT (DSP) Red Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred. CPU OPE (DSP) Green IMG0 (DSP) Green IMG1 (DSP) Green Not used. IMG2 (DSP) Green Not used IMG3 (DSP) Green Not used Lights green when the CPU is in active state. Lights green when PZ-GT16 (located in Slot 6) is in active state. Flashes green when PZ-GT16 (located in Slot 6) is in stand-by state ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 17 Revision 4.0 SN1374 CPRP-A CPU Board LAMP NAME DESCRIPTION Two sets of “7-segment LED” show the CPR processing status. The CPR processing status is determined by the Sense switch settings, and the new processing status starts when the CPURST button is pressed. The 7segment LED indication on each CPR processing status is listed below. STATUS SENSE DESCRIPTION LEFT RIGHT 1. When Program Install The HD in the CPR initializes and the program installs. (These processes execute) “F” “c” “d” Not used “F” indicated during HD format. “c” indicated when copying data from FD 1 “d” indicated while creating the directory on the HD 2. When Program Load Not used After program installation, the program should be transferred from the HD to the memory. “1” “1” indicated during this process. 3. On-line active CPR STATUS (DSP) 2 “0-9” “0-9” Not used “S” “b” “y” The active CPR in ON LINE status indicates the CPU occupancy rate in percentages (00-99%) 4. On-line stand-by CPR The stand-by CPR in ON LINE status indicates “S,” “b,” “y” 5. Program & Office data load Not used “1” “0” “1” indicated during the Program and Office data transfer from the HD to memory “0” indicated during the Office data load. 3 Not used “c” “c” indicated when copying the data from FD to HD 4 Not used “d” “d” indicated while making the directory on the HD The CPR is starting-up with ON LINE (OAI memory clear restart). 5 Note: Not used “1” “0” 6 Not used “F” C Not used “H” “1” indicated during the Program load. “0” indicated during the process. “F” indicated during HD format. The CPR is starting-up with OFF LINE. “H” indicated during the ROM data loading. The segment spinning indication shows a processing status has completed successfully, or “E” means the processing failed. Segment Spinning Indication CHAPTER 2 Page 18 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) SN1374 CPRP-A CPU Board 5. Switch Settings SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. SW (PWR) — MB Note (FDD/HDD) — MBR (DSP) — CPURST — — 1 OFF × Not used 2 OFF × Not used 3 OFF × Not used SYSTEM SELECT0 (DSP) 1 2 3 4 SYSTEM SELECT2 (DSP) Note: STANDARD SETTING ON × OFF OFF (Down) PWR is supplied to the CPR. Make-busy of the FDD/HDD. × Normal setting Make-busy Request of the CPR in which GT is located. ON (Up) × Normal setting Execute the CPR processing according to the SENSE setting. ON OFF MEANING PWR is not supplied to the CPR. ON (Up) OFF (Down) 4 SYSTEM SELECT1 (DSP) SETTING Watchdog Timer time-out is not detected. × Watchdog Timer time-out is detected. ON PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR ON OFF PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR OFF ON PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR ON OFF PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR OFF ON PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR ON OFF PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR OFF ON PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR ON OFF PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR OFF 5~8 OFF × Fixed to “OFF.” 1~8 OFF × Not used Make-busy of this circuit card is not allowed while the Floppy Disk Drive or Hard Disk Drive is being accessed. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 19 Revision 4.0 SN1374 CPRP-A CPU Board SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING The following three processes are executed at the FDD/HDD. 1 SENSE Note Note: 6. • HD format • File copied from FDD to HD • Directory created on the HD 2 On-line mode 3 File copied from FDD to HD in the FDD/HD 4 The directory created on the HD of the FDD/HDD 5 OAI memory cleared, and the CPR started up in ON LINE mode by loading the ROM data 6 HD format of the FDD/HDD C The CPR starts up in OFF LINE mode by loading the ROM data. The SENSE switch designates the CPR processing status. The new processing status starts when the CPRRST switch on the DSP is pressed while setting the SENSE switch. External Interface See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual. 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ON SW (PWR) OFF ON MB (FDD/HDD) ON MBR (DSP) ON NMI-SEL SYSTEM SELECT0 (DSP) CHAPTER 2 Page 20 Revision 4.0 1234 ON ND-70182 (E) SN1374 CPRP-A CPU Board SWITCH NAME SYSTEM SELECT1 (DSP) SYSTEM SELECT2 (DSP) SWITCH SHAPE 1234 56 78 1234 5678 REMARKS ON ON SENSE (DSP) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 21 Revision 4.0 SN1401 CPRAC-A CPU Board SN1401 CPRAC-A CPU Board 1. General The CPR consists of the following components. (a) CPU BOARD: Contains the Main Processor Unit (MPU), ROM, and 128 Mbyte of Random Access Memory (RAM). Additionally, this board may be equipped with the ISAGT (PZGT13) on its Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus, and LANI (PZ-PC19) on the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI). (b) DSP: Contains the CPR switches and the CPR status indicator lamps. (c) FDD/HDD: Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Hard Disk Drive (HDD) are mounted on a circuit card, which can be extracted and/or inserted while the system is in operation, if necessary. (d) PWR: Supplies the operating power to the CPR and also the MISC slots of the LPM. To I/O local bus DSP DSP To HUB LANI To HUB LANI CPU ISAGT ISAGT CPU LANI To HUB LANI To HUB To MISC bus Figure 2-4 Location of SN1401 CPRAC-A (CPR) in the System CHAPTER 2 Page 22 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) SN1401 CPRAC-A CPU Board 2. Mounting Location/Condition The CPR is composed of the CPU BOARD, DSP, FDD/HDD, and PWR and is located in the Local Processor Module (LPM) as shown below. Since the CPR provides the Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus and Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, the GT and LANI cards are located in those busses respectively. PIM0 BSCM LPM PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) CPR PZ-PC19 (LANI) PZ-PW92 (PWR) CPU BOARD PZ-DK224 (DSP) PZ-IO27(FDD/HDD) Figure 2-5 CPR Location ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 23 Revision 4.0 SN1401 CPRAC-A CPU Board 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The CPR has the following lamps, switches and connectors. Slots 0-3 provide the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, and Slots 4-6 are the Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus. PWR(PZ-PW92) FDD/HDD(PZ-IO27) DSP(PZ-DK224) PZ-PW92 DC-40V~-58.6V A B HDD SW I ON MBR O -48V OUT ON OFF CPU OPE WDT IMG1 SYSTEM SELECT0 5A 125V AC/DC IMG3 STATUS ON 1 4 SYSTEM SELECT1 OUTPWR SENSE ON PALM 1 12 SYSTEM SELECT2 ON 13 INPWR IMG2 IMG0 CPURST 20 ON ALM SLOT NO. 0 1 2 3 4 5 Figure 2-6 Front View of CPR 4. Lamp Indications LAMP NAME COLOR ON (PWR) Green Lights green when the PWR is supplied. ALM (PWR) Red Lights red when the PWR is abnormal. HDD (FDD/HDD) Red Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed. WDT (DSP) Red Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurs. CPU OPE (DSP) Green IMG0 (DSP) Green IMG1 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG1 is mounted. Note IMG2 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG2 is mounted. Note IMG3 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG3 is mounted. Note Note: DESCRIPTION Lights green when the CPU is in active state. Lights green when PZ-GT13 (located in Slot 6) is in active state. Flashes green when PZ-GT13 (located in Slot 6) is in stand-by state. No lamp indication in STBY mode. CHAPTER 2 Page 24 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) 6 SN1401 CPRAC-A CPU Board LAMP NAME DESCRIPTION Two set of “7-segment LED” shows the CPR processing status. The CPR processing status is determined by the SENSE switch settings, and the new processing status starts when the CPURST switch is pressed. The 7-segment LED indication on each CPR processing status is listed below. STATUS SENSE DESCRIPTION LEFT RIGHT 1. When Program Install Not used The HD in the CPR initializes and the program is installed. (These processes execute) “F” “c” “d” “F” indicated during HD format. “c” indicated when copying the data from FD to HD 1 “d” indicated while creating the directory on the HD 2. When Program Load Not used After the program installation, the program should be transferred from the HD to the memory. “1” “1” indicated during this process. 3. On-line active CPR STATUS (DSP) 2 “0-9” “0-9” Not used “S” “b” “y” The active CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates the CPU occupancy rate in percentages. (00-99%) 4. On-line stand-by CPR The stand-by CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates “S,” “b,” “y” 5. Program & Office data load Not used “1” “0” “1” indicated during the Program and Office data transferred from the HD to the memory “0” indicated during the Office data load 3 Not used “c” “c” indicated during copy the data from FD to HD 4 Not used “d” “d” indicated while making the directory on the HD The CPR is starting-up with ON LINE (OAI memory clear restart). 5 Note: Not used “1” “0” 6 Not used “F” C Not used “H” “1” indicated during the Program load. “0” indicated during the process. “F” indicated during HD format. The CPR is starting-up with OFF LINE. “H” indicated during the ROM data loading. The segment spinning indication shows a processing status has completed successfully, or else “E” means the processing failed. Segment Spinning Indication ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 25 Revision 4.0 SN1401 CPRAC-A CPU Board 5. Switch Settings SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. SW (PWR) — MB Note (FDD/HDD) — MBR (DSP) — CPURST — — 1 OFF × Not used 2 OFF × Not used 3 OFF × Not used SYSTEM SELECT0 (DSP) 1 2 3 4 SYSTEM SELECT2 (DSP) Note: STANDARD SETTING ON × OFF OFF (Down) PWR is supplied to the CPR. Make-busy of the FDD/HDD. × Normal setting. Make-busy Request of the CPR in which the GT is located. ON (Up) × Normal setting. Execute the CPR processing according to the SENSE setting. ON OFF MEANING PWR is not supplied to the CPR. ON (Up) OFF (Down) 4 SYSTEM SELECT1 (DSP) SETTING Watchdog Timer time-out is not detected. × Watchdog Timer time-out is detected. ON PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR ON OFF PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR OFF ON PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR ON OFF PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR OFF ON PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR ON OFF PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR OFF ON PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR ON OFF PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR OFF 5~8 OFF × Fixed to “OFF.” 1~8 OFF × Not used Make-busy of this circuit card is not allowed while the Floppy Disk Drive or Hard Disk Drive is being accessed. CHAPTER 2 Page 26 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) SN1401 CPRAC-A CPU Board SWITCH NAME STANDARD SETTING SETTING MEANING The following three process are executed at the FDD/HDD. 1 × 2 SENSE Note Note: 6. • HD format • File copied from FDD to HD • Directory created on the HD On line mode. 3 File copied from FDD to HD within the FDD/HDD. 4 Directory created on the HD of the FDD/HDD. 5 OAI memory clear, and the CPR starts up in ON LINE mode by loading the ROM data. 6 HD format of the FDD/HDD. C The CPR starts up in OFF LINE mode by loading the ROM data. The SENSE switch designates the CPR processing status. The new processing status starts when the CPRRST switch on the DSP is pressed while setting the SENSE switch. External Interface See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual. 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ON SW (PWR) OFF ON MB (FDD/HDD) ON MBR (DSP) ON NMI-SEL ON SYSTEM SELECT0 1234 SYSTEM SELECT1 12345678 ON SYSTEM SELECT2 12345678 ON SENSE ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 27 Revision 4.0 PH-GT09 Gate PH-GT09 Gate 1. General Function The PH-GT09 (GT) circuit card provides both the TSW I/O Local bus and the MISC bus interface. The CPR controls TSW, PLO, DLKC, and MISC via the ISAGT and GT. PLO1 PLO0 TDSW13 TDSW I/O Local Bus TDSW03 TDSW I/O Local Bus TDSW12 TDSW02 TDSW11 TDSW01 TDSW10 TDSW00 MISC Bus DLKC0 DLKC1 MISC GT GT DSP To HUB LANI To HUB LANI CPU DSP ISAGT ISAGT CPR #0 MISC Bus CPU LANI To HUB LANI To HUB CPR #1 EMA MISC Bus IOC/ MISC Figure 2-7 Location of PH-GT09 (GT) Card in the System CHAPTER 2 Page 28 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-GT09 Gate 2. Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below. Mounting Module TSWM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 GT1 GT0 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-8. OPE/MB MB MBR Figure 2-8 Face Layout of PH-GT09 (GT) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 29 Revision 4.0 PH-GT09 Gate 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR OPE/MB Green 5. STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state. Switch Settings Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SETTING UP MB × Normal setting When the ACT side of GT’s MBR switch is flipped, the ST-BY side of TSW, DLKC, and GT is forced to switch over the ACT side. (When the TSW is dual configuration.) UP × DOWN 6. MEANING Make-busy of circuit card DOWN MBR Note Note: STANDARD SETTING Normal setting. Prior to extracting the GT card, flip the MBR switch on and then flip the MB switch on. External Interface See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual. 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME MB MBR CHAPTER 2 Page 30 Revision 4.0 SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ON ON ND-70182 (E) SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A CPU Board SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A CPU Board 1. General Function The CPR consists of the following components. (a) CPU BOARD: Contains the Main Processor Unit (MPU), ROM, and 128 Mbyte of Random Access Memory (RAM). This board may also contain the ISAGT (PZ-GT13/PZ-GT20) on its Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus, and LANI (PZ-PC19) on the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI). (b) DSP: Contains the CPR switches and the CPR status indicator lamps. (c) FDD/HDD: Floppy Disk Drive (FDD) and Hard Disk Drive (HDD) are mounted on a circuit card, which, if necessary, can be extracted and/or inserted while the system is in operation. (d) PWR: Supplies the operating power to the CPR and also the MISC slots of the LPM. To I/O local bus HDD FDD HDD DSP DSP To HUB LANI CPU To HUB LANI CPR#0 ISAGT ISAGT FDD CPU LANI To HUB CPR#1 LANI To HUB To MISC bus Figure 2-9 Location of SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A (CPR) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 31 Revision 4.0 SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A CPU Board 2. Mounting Location/Condition The CPR is composed of the CPU BOARD, DSP, FDD/HDD, and PWR and is located in the Local Processor Module (LPM) as shown in Figure 2-10. Since the CPR provides the Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus and Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, the ISAGT and LANI cards are located in those busses respectively. ISWM/PIM0 BSCM LPM PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) Note CPR PZ-PC19 (LANI) PZ-PC19 (LANI) PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) PZ-PW92 (PWR) CPU BOARD PZ-DK224 (DSP) PZ-IO27(FDD/HDD) Note: This card is mounted in the IMG0 of the IMX-U system only. Figure 2-10 CPR Location CHAPTER 2 Page 32 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A CPU Board 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The CPR contains the following lamps, switches and connectors. Slots 0-3 provide the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) bus, and Slots 4-6 are the Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus. PWR(PZ-PW92) FDD/HDD(PZ-IO27) DSP(PZ-DK224) Note PZ-PW92 DC-40V~-58.6V A B HDD SW I ON MBR O -48V OUT ON OFF CPU OPE WDT IMG1 SYSTEM SELECT0 5A 125V AC/DC IMG2 IMG0 IMG3 STATUS ON 1 4 SYSTEM SELECT1 OUTPWR SENSE ON PALM 1 12 SYSTEM SELECT2 ON 13 INPWR CPURST 20 ON ALM SLOT NO. Note: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 This card is mounted in the IMG0 of the IMX-U system only. Figure 2-11 Front View of CPR 4. Lamp Indications Lamp Indications vary depending on the node. The following shows the lamp indications for the CPR in the IMG. LAMP NAME COLOR DESCRIPTION ON (PWR) Green Lights green when the PWR is supplied. ALM (PWR) Red Lights red when the PWR is abnormal. HDD (FDD/HDD) Red Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed. WDT (DSP) Red Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred. CPU OPE (DSP) Green Lights green when the CPU is in active state. CPU OPE (DSP) Green Lights green when the CPU is in active state. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 33 Revision 4.0 SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A CPU Board LAMP NAME COLOR IMG0 (DSP) Green Flashes green when PZ-GT13 (located in slot number 6) is in operation. IMG1 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG1 is mounted. Note IMG2 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG2 is mounted. Note IMG3 (DSP) Green Flashes green when IMG3 is mounted. Note Note: DESCRIPTION No lamp indication in STBY mode. The following shows the lamp indication for the CPR in the ISW LAMP NAME COLOR ON (PWR) Green Lights green when the PWR is supplied. ALM (PWR) Red Lights red when the PWR is abnormal. HDD (FDD/HDD) Red Lights red while the HDD or FDD is being accessed. WDT (DSP) Red Lights red when Watch-dog Timer (WDT) time-out has occurred. CPU OPE (DSP) Green IMG0 (DSP) Green IMG1 (DSP) Green Lights green when the TSW1 of the ISW is used. Note IMG2 (DSP) Green Lights green when the TSW2 of the ISW is used. Note IMG3 (DSP) Green Lights green when the TSW3 of the ISW is used. Note Note: DESCRIPTION Lights green when the CPU of the ISW is in active state. Lights green when the CPU of the ISW is in active state. Flashes green when the CPU of the ISW is in stand-by state. No lamp indication in STBY mode. CHAPTER 2 Page 34 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A CPU Board LAMP NAME DESCRIPTION Two sets of “7-segment LED” show the CPR processing status. The CPR processing status is determined by the SENSE switch settings, and the new processing status starts when the CPURST switch is pressed. The 7-segment LED indication on each CPR processing status is listed below. STATUS SENSE DESCRIPTION LEFT RIGHT 1. When Program Install The HD in the CPR is initialized and the program is installed. (These three processes execute) “F” “c” “d” Not used “F” indicated during HD format. “c” indicated when copying data from FD to HD 1 “d” indicated while making the directory on the HD 2. When Program Load Not used After program installation, the program should be transferred from the HD to memory. “1” “1” is indicated during this process. 3. On-line active CPR STATUS (DSP) 2 “0-9” “0-9” Not used “S” “b” “y” The active CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates the CPU occupancy rate by percentage. (00-99%) 4. On-line stand-by CPR The stand-by CPR which is in ON LINE status indicates “S,” “b,” “y” 5. Program & Office data load Not used “1” “0” “1” indicated during the Program and Office data transfer from the HD to the memory “0” indicated during the Office data load 3 Not used “c” “c” indicated when copying the data from FD to HD 4 Not used “d” “d” indicated while making the directory on the HD 5 Not used The CPR is starting-up with ON LINE (OAI memory clear restart). “1” “0” “1” indicated during the Program load. “0” indicated during the process. Note: 6 Not used “F” C Not used “H” “F” indicated during HD format. The CPR is starting-up OFF LINE. “H” indicated during the ROM data loading. The segment spinning indication shows a processing status has completed successfully, or indicates “E” meaning the processing failed. Segment Spinning Indication ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 35 Revision 4.0 SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A CPU Board 5. Switch Settings SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. SW (PWR) — MB Note (FDD/HDD) — MBR (DSP) — CPURST (DSP) — — 1 OFF × Not used 2 OFF × Not used 3 OFF × Not used SYSTEM SELECT0 (DSP) 1 2 3 4 5~7 8 SYSTEM SELECT2 (DSP) Note: STANDARD SETTING ON × OFF OFF (Down) 1~8 PWR is supplied to the CPR. Make-busy of the FDD/HDD. × Normal setting. Make-busy Request of the CPR in which GT is located. ON (Up) × Normal setting. Execute the CPR processing according to the SENSE setting. ON OFF MEANING PWR is not supplied to the CPR. ON (Up) OFF (Down) 4 SYSTEM SELECT1 (DSP) SETTING Watchdog Timer time-out is not detected. × Watchdog Timer time-out is detected. ON PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR ON. OFF PCI Card (Slot 0) MBR OFF. ON PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR ON. OFF PCI Card (Slot 1) MBR OFF. ON PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR ON. OFF PCI Card (Slot 2) MBR OFF. ON PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR ON. OFF PCI Card (Slot 3) MBR OFF. OFF × Fixed to “OFF.” ON IMX-U System OFF 1 IMG/4 IMG System OFF × Not used Make-busy of this circuit card is not allowed while the Floppy Disk Drive or Hard Disk Drive is being accessed. CHAPTER 2 Page 36 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A CPU Board SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING The following three processes are executed at the FDD/HDD. 1 SENSE (DSP) Note Note: 2 × • HD formatted • File copied from FDD to HD • Directory created on the HD On-line mode. 3 File copied from FDD to HD within the FDD/HDD. 4 Directory created on the HD of the FDD/HDD. 5 OAI memory cleared, and the CPR started up in ON LINE mode by loading the ROM data. 6 HD format of the FDD/HDD. C The CPR starts up in OFF LINE mode by loading the ROM data. The SENSE switch designates the CPR processing status. The new processing status starts when the CPRRST switch on the DSP is pressed while setting the SENSE switch. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 37 Revision 4.0 SN1455 CPRAQ-A/SN1531 CPRAS-A CPU Board 6. External Interface See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual. 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE ON SW (PWR) OFF ON MB (PWR:PZ-PW106) ON MB (FDD/HDD) ON MBR (DSP) SYSTEM SELECT0 (DSP) SYSTEM SELECT1 (DSP) SYSTEM SELECT2 (DSP) REMARKS 1234 ON 12345678 ON 12345678 ON SENSE (DSP) CHAPTER 2 Page 38 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-GT10 Input Output Gate PH-GT10 Input Output Gate 1. General Function The PH-GT10 circuit card provides the TSW I/O bus interface for permitting the CPU board to control the TSW, HSW, and PLO cards within the Inter-node Switch Module (ISWM) of the ISW. Additionally, this circuit card is equipped with the copy function to be consistent with the data of TSW I/O bus in both systems (single/dual). This circuit card is used for the IMX-U system. ISWM RES RES HSW01 HSW11 HSW00 HSW10 TSW03 TSW13 TSW02 TSW12 TSW01 TSW11 TSW00 TSW10 PLO 1 TSW I/O BUS TSW I/O BUS PLO 0 RES (IOGT0) PH-GT10 (IOGT1) PH-GT10 ISAGT BUS LPM ISAGT BUS MISC LANI LANI RES CPU ISAGT IOC LANI ISAGT CPU LANI EMA MISC I/O BUS Figure 2-12 Location of PH-GT10 (IOGT) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 39 Revision 4.0 PH-GT10 Input Output Gate 2. Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below. Mounting Module 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 IOGT(#1) 3. 02 IOGT(#0) 00 01 ISWM 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-13. OPE/MB MB MBR PWRALM CA4L COPY Figure 2-13 Face Layout of PH-GT10 (IOGT) CHAPTER 2 Page 40 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-GT10 Input Output Gate 4. Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR Green TSW ACT MEANING Lights when this circuit card is in ACT state. OFF This circuit card is in ST-BY state. Red Lights when this circuit card is in make-busy state. PWRALM Red Lights when On-Board Power Supply for this circuit card is abnormal. CA4L Red Lights when 4MHz clock supplied for Local I/O Bus is faulty. COPY Green 5. Lights when this circuit card is in COPY mode. Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SETTING UP Circuit Card make busy MB × DOWN Circuit Card make busy cancel UP Make busy request MBR × DOWN 6. MEANING Make busy request cancel External Interface See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual. 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME MB MBR SWITCH SHAPE ON ON Note: Normal operating mode is down. Note: Normal operating mode is down. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 41 Revision 4.0 PA-PC94 Data Link Multiplexer PA-PC94 Data Link Multiplexer 1. General Function This circuit card mainly provides the two functions: 1) collection of BLF/TGBL information (associated with Attendant/Desk Console operation) from DLKC cards of all nodes in an IMX-U system, and 2) distribution of the collected data to ATI cards of all nodes. While a DLKC card can manage this processing solely on an accommodated node basis, the use of this card makes possible the BLF/TGBL management even on a system basis, via the Inter-node Switch (ISW). Note that this card is mounted in a PIM of any node, and if necessary, can have an optional dual configuration. For details on BLF/TGBL information, refer to the following service features explained in the “Feature Programming Manual”. • • Busy Lamp Field-Flexible [B-2] Trunk Group Busy Lamp [T-9] This figure shows an example where a pair of DLMX cards (No. 0/No. 1 system) is accommodated in a PIM of LN0. IMX-U System LN 0 (TSW 1) LN 1 ISW (TSW 1) TSW/HSW 1 TSW 0 (DLMX 1) TSW/HSW 0 TSW 0 OUT ATI DLMX 0 Note IN (DLKC 1) DLKC 0 ATI (TSW 1) (DLKC 1) LN 2 TSW 0 DLKC 0 ATI (DLKC 1) DLKC 0 : Circuit Card (TSW 1) : Circuit Card (No. 1 System) LN 3 TSW 0 : BLF/TGBL data from DLKC : BLF/TGBL data to ATI ATI : BLF/TGBL data from DLKC (No. 1 system) (DLKC 1) : BLF/TGBL data to ATI (No. 1 system) DLKC 0 BLF: Busy Lamp Field - Flexible TGBL: Trunk Group Busy Lamp Note: IN - DLMX card gathers BLF/TGBL information from DLKC card of each node, via ISW. OUT - DLMX card sends the collected BLF/TGBL information to ATI card(s) of each node, via ISW. Figure 2-14 Location of PA-PC94 (DLMX) CHAPTER 2 Page 42 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-PC94 Data Link Multiplexer 2. Mounting Location/Condition When this circuit card is used in a single configuration. Mount this circuit card in any of the shaded slots Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 HW 6 DLMX HW 2 DLMX HW 1 DLMX HW 0 DLMX DLMX DLMX Highway block HW 7 HW 8 Mounting Condition Mounting conditions of this circuit card are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. This circuit card cannot be mounted in Slot 05, 07, 09, 10, 11, 12, 16, 18, 19, 21, 22, 23. This card is used in odd-number group (G) of the shaded slots above. To used this card, be sure to assign “RT=938” on the ASDT command. Do not mount another line/trunk circuit card in a slot adjoining the DLMX card within the same Highway Block (HW) (i.e. do not mount other line/trunk card in the right side of the slot where a DLMX card is mounted). When this circuit card is used in a dual configuration. Mount this circuit card in any of the shaded slots: Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 DLMX #1 HW 7 DLMX #0 DLMX #1 HW 6 DLMX #0 HW 2 DLMX #1 DLMX #0 DLMX #1 HW 1 DLMX #0 DLMX #1 HW 0 DLMX #0 DLMX #1 DLMX #0 Highway Block HW 8 Mounting Condition Mounting conditions of this circuit card are as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. A pair of DLMX card No. 0/No. 1 systems must be mounted in the same Highway Block (HW). This circuit card cannot be mounted in 32-port slot (10, 11,12, 21, 22, 23). This card is used in odd-number group (G) of the shaded slots above. To use this card, be sure to assign “RT=938” on the ASDT command. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 43 Revision 4.0 PA-PC94 Data Link Multiplexer 3. Face Layout of Lamps and Switches The face layout of lamps and switches is shown in Figure 2-15. OPE MB KEY LYR ACT LB LOAD PWALM MNT MODE Figure 2-15 Face Layout of PA-PC94 (DLMX) 4. Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below: LAMP NAME COLOR OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation. Green Lights when this circuit card is in a active state. OFF Off when this circuit card is in a stand-by state. LYR OFF Off when this circuit card is in normal operation. LB OFF Off when this circuit card is in normal operation. LOAD OFF Off when this circuit card is in normal operation. PWALM Red Lights when OBP alarm ACT CHAPTER 2 Page 44 Revision 4.0 STATE ND-70182 (E) PA-PC94 Data Link Multiplexer 5. Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SWITCH No. SETTING UP MB MNT 6. MEANING Circuit card make-busy. DOWN Circuit card make-busy cancel 0 OFF × Fixed to OFF. 1 OFF × Fixed to OFF. 2 OFF × Fixed to OFF. 3 MODE STANDARD SETTING ON Make-busy-request. OFF Cancel the make-busy-request. × 0 1-7 Standard setting. (TSW fixed connection) Not used Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ON MB ON MNT MODE 3 2 1 0 0 ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 45 Revision 4.0 PA-PW54-A Dual Power PA-PW54-A Dual Power 1. General Function The PA-PW54-A (DPWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards located in the PIM. The -48 V input power source, which is converted to +5 V, -5 V, and +12 V, is distributed to each circuit card in the PIM. This card also has a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and voltage can be selected from 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 75 Vrms, 90 Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a Howler Tone circuit resides on this card. PA-PW54-A (DPWR) PA-PW55-A (PWR) DC-DC DC-DC +5V, +12V, -5V RGU RGU CR (For LC) HOW HOW REL REL HOW (For LC) SUB PWR SUB PWR NFB NFB -48 V (For LC, TRK) +80 V (For MWL) -48 V +80V (Option) Note Note: The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) . Figure 2-16 Location of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card in the System CHAPTER 2 Page 46 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-PW54-A Dual Power 2. Mounting Location/Conditions This circuit card is mounted in the following slot. Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 DPWR (PA-PW54-A) PIM ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 47 Revision 4.0 PA-PW54-A Dual Power 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-17. PAPW54 ) -A ( U P -48V -48V -48V DC SW IN INPUT CONN +80VOUT 5A 125V AC/DC SW4 -48V SW 5.0 A FUSE MB FUSE 0.5 A RST RGUOUT 0.5A 125V AC/DC -48VOUT 25A AC250V DC125V 25A SIDE VIEW +80V ON -48V ON RGU ON DC ON OPE CPU ALM DC ALM RGU ALM HOW ALM FRONT VIEW Figure 2-17 Face Layout of PA-PW54-A (DPWR) Card CHAPTER 2 Page 48 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-PW54-A Dual Power 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR +80V ON Green Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied. –48 V ON Green Remains lit while –48 V input power is being supplied. RGU ON Green Remains lit while RGU output is in progress. DC ON Green Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and –5 V are being output normally. OPE Green Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible. CPUALM Red Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated. DCALM Red Lights when +5 V, +12 V, or –5 V outputs alarm. RGUALM Red Lights when RGU voltage alarm. HOWALM Red Lights when howler alarm. 5. STATE Switch Settings This circuit card has the following switches. SWITCH NAME SWITCH No. –48V SW — RESET — MB — 1 SW4 2 6. SETTING STANDARD SETTING ON × DESCRIPTION –48 V input power is supplied. OFF –48 V input power is not supplied. PUSH Hardware reset of the circuit card. — × ON OFF Normal setting. Make-busy of the circuit card. × ON Normal setting. Frequency of Ringing Signal: 25 [Hz] OFF × Frequency of Ringing Signal: 20 [Hz] ON × Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms] OFF Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms] External Interface No cable connections are required. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 49 Revision 4.0 PA-PW54-A Dual Power 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS –48 V RESET MB DOWN 1 Circuit card Make-busy cancel 2 ON 20 [Hz] 90 [Vrms] SW4 CHAPTER 2 Page 50 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-PW54-B Dual Power PA-PW54-B Dual Power 1. General Function The PA-PW54-B (DPWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated in the PIM. The -48V input power source, which is converted to +5V, -5V, and +12V, is distributed to each circuit card in the PIM. This card is also equipped with a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and voltage can be selected among 20Hz, 25Hz, 75Vrms, 90Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a Howler Tone circuit resides on this card. PA-PW54-B (DPWR) PA-PW55-B (PWR) DC-DC DC-DC +5V, +12V, -5V RGU RGU CR (For LC) HOW HOW REL REL HOW (For LC) SUB PWR SUB PWR NFB NFB -48 V (For LC, TRK) +80 V (For MWL) -48 V +80V (Option) Note Note: The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs). Figure 2-18 Location of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card within the System ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 51 Revision 4.0 PA-PW54-B Dual Power 2. Mounting Location/Conditions This circuit card is mounted in the following slot. Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 CHAPTER 2 Page 52 Revision 4.0 DPWR (PA-PW54-B) PIM ND-70182 (E) PA-PW54-B Dual Power Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-19. PAPW54 ) -B ( U P -48V -48V -48V DC SW IN INPUT CONN +80VOUT 5A 125V AC/DC SW4 -48V SW 5.0 A FUSE MB FUSE 0.5 A RGUOUT 0.5A 125V AC/DC RST -48VOUT 25A AC250V DC125V SIDE VIEW 20A 3. +80V ON -48V ON RGU ON DC ON OPE CPU ALM DC ALM RGU ALM HOW ALM FRONT VIEW Figure 2-19 Face Layout of PA-PW54-B (DPWR) Card ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 53 Revision 4.0 PA-PW54-B Dual Power 4. Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR +80V ON Green Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied. –48 V ON Green Remains lit while –48 V input power is being supplied. RGU ON Green Remains lit while RGU output is in progress. DC ON Green Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and –5 V are being output normally. OPE Green Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible. CPUALM Red Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated. DCALM Red Lights in the case of +5V, +12V, or –5 V outputs alarm. RGUALM Red Lights in the case of RGU voltage alarm. HOWALM Red Lights in the case of howler alarm. 5. STATE Switch Settings This circuit card has the following switches. SWITCH NAME SWITCH No. –48V SW — RESET — MB — 1 SW4 2 6. SETTING STANDARD SETTING ON × DESCRIPTION –48V input power is supplied. OFF –48V input power is not supplied. PUSH Hardware reset of the circuit card. — × ON OFF Normal setting Make busy of the circuit card. × ON Normal setting Frequency of Ringing Signal: 25 [Hz] OFF × Frequency of Ringing Signal: 20 [Hz] ON × Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms] OFF Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms] External Interface No cable connections are required. CHAPTER 2 Page 54 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-PW54-B Dual Power 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS –48 V RESET MB ON DOWN Circuit card make busy cancel 1 20 [Hz] 90 [Vrms] 2 SW4 ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 55 Revision 4.0 PA-PW55-A Power PA-PW55-A Power 1. General Function The PA-PW55-A (PWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards located in the PIM. The -48 V input power source, which is converted to +5 V, -5 V, and +12 V, is distributed to each circuit card in the associated PIM. This card also has a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and voltage can be selected from 20 Hz, 25 Hz, 75 Vrms, 90 Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a Howler Tone circuit resides on this card. PA-PW54-A (DPWR) PA-PW55-A (PWR) DC-DC DC-DC +5V, +12V, -5V RGU RGU CR (For LC) HOW HOW REL REL HOW (For LC) SUB PWR NFB SUB PWR NFB -48 V (For LC, TRK) +80 V (For MWL) -48 V +80V (Option) Note Note: The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs) . Figure 2-20 Location of PA-PW55-A (PWR) Card in the System CHAPTER 2 Page 56 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-PW55-A Power 2. Mounting Location/Conditions This circuit card is mounted in the following slots. Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PWR (PA-PW55-A) PIM ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 57 Revision 4.0 PA-PW55-A Power 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-21. PAPW55 ) -A ( U P -48V -48V -48V DC SW IN INPUT CONN +80VOUT 5A 125V AC/DC SW4 -48V SW 5.0 A FUSE MB FUSE 0.5 A RST RGUOUT 0.5A 125V AC/DC -48VOUT 25A AC250V DC125V 25A SIDE VIEW +80V ON -48V ON RGU ON DC ON OPE CPU ALM DC ALM RGU ALM HOW ALM FRONT VIEW Figure 2-21 Face Layout of PA-PW55-A Card CHAPTER 2 Page 58 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-PW55-A Power 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR +80V ON Green Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied. –48 V ON Green Remains lit while –48 V input power is being supplied. RGU ON Green Remains lit while RGU output is in progress. DC ON Green Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and –5 V are being output normally. OPE Green Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible. CPUALM Red Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated. DCALM Red Lights when +5 V, +12 V, or –5 V outputs alarm. RGUALM Red Lights when RGU voltage alarm. HOWALM Red Lights when howler alarm. 5. STATE Switch Settings This circuit card has the following switches. SWITCH NAME SWITCH No. –48 V SW RESET MB STANDARD SETTING ON × — SW4 2 DESCRIPTION –48 V input power is supplied. OFF –48 V input power is not supplied. PUSH Hardware reset of the circuit card. — 1 6. SETTING × ON OFF Normal setting Make-busy of the circuit card. × ON Normal setting Frequency of Ringing Signal: 25 [Hz] OFF × Frequency of Ringing Signal: 20 [Hz] ON × Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms] OFF Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms] External Interface No cable connections are required. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 59 Revision 4.0 PA-PW55-A Power 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS –48 V RESET MB DOWN 1 Circuit card Make-busy cancel. 2 ON 20 [Hz] 90 [Vrms] SW4 CHAPTER 2 Page 60 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-PW55-B Power PA-PW55-B Power 1. General Function The PA-PW55-B (PWR) circuit card supplies operating power to circuit cards accommodated in the PIM. The -48V input power source, which is converted to +5V, -5V, and +12V, is distributed to each circuit card in the associated PIM. This card is also equipped with a Ringing Generator Unit (RGU), whose output frequency and voltage can be selected among 20Hz, 25Hz, 75Vrms, 90Vrms by switch setting on this card. In addition, a Howler Tone circuit resides on this card. PA-PW54-B (DPWR) PA-PW55-B (PWR) DC-DC DC-DC +5V, +12V, -5V RGU RGU CR (For LC) HOW HOW REL REL HOW (For LC) SUB PWR SUB PWR NFB NFB -48 V (For LC, TRK) +80 V (For MWL) -48 V +80V (Option) Note Note: The +80V input is required for activating Message Waiting Lamps (MWLs). Figure 2-22 Location of PA-PW55-B (PWR) Card Within the System ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 61 Revision 4.0 PA-PW55-B Power 2. Mounting Location/Conditions This circuit card is mounted in the following slots. Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PWR (PA-PW55-B) PIM CHAPTER 2 Page 62 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-PW55-B Power Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-23. PAPW55 ) -B ( U P -48V -48V -48V DC SW IN INPUT CONN +80VOUT 5A 125V AC/DC SW4 -48V SW 5.0 A FUSE MB FUSE 0.5 A RGUOUT 0.5A 125V AC/DC RST -48VOUT 25A AC250V DC125V SIDE VIEW 20A 3. +80V ON -48V ON RGU ON DC ON OPE CPU ALM DC ALM RGU ALM HOW ALM FRONT VIEW Figure 2-23 Face Layout of PA-PW55-B Card ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 63 Revision 4.0 PA-PW55-B Power 4. Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR +80V ON Green Remains lit while +80 V input power is being supplied. –48 V ON Green Remains lit while –48 V input power is being supplied. RGU ON Green Remains lit while RGU output is in progress. DC ON Green Remains lit while +5 V, +12 V, and –5 V are being output normally. OPE Green Lights when information exchange with the CPU is possible. CPUALM Red Lights when reset of the microprocessor has been activated. DCALM Red Lights in the case of +5V, +12V, or –5 V outputs alarm. RGUALM Red Lights in the case of RGU voltage alarm. HOWALM Red Lights in the case of howler alarm. 5. STATE Switch Settings This circuit card has the following switches. SWITCH NAME SWITCH No. –48V SW RESET MB STANDARD SETTING ON × — SW4 2 DESCRIPTION –48V input power is supplied. OFF –48V input power is not supplied. PUSH Hardware reset of the circuit card. — 1 6. SETTING × ON OFF Normal setting Make busy of the circuit card. × ON Normal setting Frequency of Ringing Signal: 25 [Hz] OFF × Frequency of Ringing Signal: 20 [Hz] ON × Voltage of Ringing Signal: 90 [Vrms] OFF Voltage of Ringing Signal: 75 [Vrms] External Interface No cable connections are required. CHAPTER 2 Page 64 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-PW55-B Power 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS –48 V RESET MB DOWN 1 ON Circuit card make busy cancel 2 20 [Hz] 90 [Vrms] SW4 ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 65 Revision 4.0 PH-IO24 Input/Output Controller PH-IO24 Input/Output Controller 1. General Function The PH-IO24 (IOC) circuit card supplies the system with a serial interface, which conforms to RS-232C, between external equipment such as the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT), Station Message Detail Recording System (SMDR), Message Center Interface (MCI). Property Management System (PMS). The relationship between the IOC card and the associated cards is as follows, when the CPU is composed in a dual configuration. Note: Firmware SP-3290 IO24 LV2 PROG-A is required in the Hotel system for PMS and Hotel Printer. CPU BOARD #0 CPU BOARD GT #0 GT #1 #1 I/O I/O MISC MISC I/O BUS EMA FDD/HDD #0 FDD/HDD #1 MISC/IOC IOC for Business IOC for Hotel MAT SMDR MCI PMS Hotel Printer Figure 2-24 Location of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card within the System CHAPTER 2 Page 66 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-IO24 Input/Output Controller 2. Mounting Location/Condition The IOC cards can be accommodated in the shaded slots (02, 03) as shown below. Note: When using Business system and Hotel system, prepare the circuit card for each system. Mounting Module 03 IOC #0 3. 02 IOC #1 00 01 LPM 04 Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-25. OPE MB MBR IOC ALM PORT0 PORT1 PORT2 PORT3 SW50 Figure 2-25 Face Layout of PH-IO24 (IOC) Card ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 67 Revision 4.0 PH-IO24 Input/Output Controller 4. Lamp Indications The table below shows lamp indications on this circuit card. LAMP NAME COLOR OPE/MB Green IOC ALM This circuit card is operating normally. Red This circuit card is placed in the make busy state. Red Clock down WDT alarm occurs to the microprocessor. PORT0 - PORT3 5. DESCRIPTION RS-232C signal status indication. n = port number (0-3) SDn Green SD:Send Data RDn Green RD:Receive Data ERn Green ER:Equipment Ready DRn Green DR:Data Ready CDn Green CD:Carrier Detect Switch Settings The following is a brief description of the switches on this circuit card. When a switch has a standard setting, it is indicated with “×” in the table below. SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD SETTING UP MB DOWN The circuit card is placed into a make busy status. × UP MBR DOWN DESCRIPTION Cancellation of Make Busy. The circuit card is placed into a make busy request status. × Cancellation of Make Busy Request. ON This circuit card is used as the extended I/O circuit card #1. OFF This circuit card is used as the extended I/O circuit card #0. 1 ON 2 OFF × ON SW50 2 OFF Not used (For Business System Only). Free Wheeling with ACK signal (For Hotel System Only). × Free Wheeling. ON 3 OFF × Not used ON 4 OFF CHAPTER 2 Page 68 Revision 4.0 × Not used ND-70182 (E) PH-IO24 Input/Output Controller 6. External Interface As illustrated below, the “68PH S 2PORTS CA-A” cable is required to connect external equipment such as the MAT, SMDR, MCI and PRT. Securely insert the connector of the 68PH S 2PORTS CA-A into the appropriate MISC connector. Refer to the table listed below. RS-232C cable (Note 2) MISC 3B/4B (Note 1) Backplane 68PH S 2PORTS CA-A TYP0 Circuit #0 To RS-232C Terminal AMP AMP Circuit #1 TYP1 PH-IO24 (IOC) TYP0 68PH S 2PORTS CA-A Circuit #2 TYP1 MISC 3A/4A (Note 1) Circuit #3 Note 1: The relationship between the MISC connectors and the mounting slot of the IOC (PH-IO24) circuit card is shown below. Mounting Slot IOC Circuit Number MISC Connector #0, #1 MISC 3B #2, #3 MISC 3A #0, #1 MISC 4B #2, #3 MISC 4A 02 03 Note 2: The type of cables varies depending on a connected terminal and/or whether modems are used or not. More detailed information on the connecting cables is explained in the “Installation Procedure Manual”. Pin 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 TYP0, 1 Connector Signal name Pin Signal name SD 26 RD 27 RS 28 CS 29 30 DR SG 31 32 CD ER 33 34 PB/CI RT 35 ST1 36 ST2 37 38 39 40 41 42 TYP0, 1 Lead Accommodation Figure 2-26 External Cable Connection for PH-IO24 (IOC) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 69 Revision 4.0 PH-IO24 Input/Output Controller 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS MB MBR Meaning of SW50-1: ON SW50 CHAPTER 2 Page 70 Revision 4.0 1234 ON: OFF: This card is used as the No. 1 circuit card. This card is used as the No. 0 circuit card. ND-70182 (E) PH-M22 MMC PH-M22 MMC 1. General Function The main functions of the PH-M22 circuit card are: • To collect the key setting information on the TOPU of the ISW and send the information to the ISW/ the other LNs, depending on the ISEL key setting on the ISW. • To collect various alarm information from all the IMGs/ISW and activate MJ/MN LED on the TOPU display. This circuit card is used for the IMX-U system. LN PZ-DK222 (TOP KEY) ISW PZ-DK227 (TOP KEY) PH-M22 PH-PC40 RECEIVER ISEL PH-M22 PH-PC40 RECEIVER SEL EMA EMA RELAY RELAY LN PZ-DK222 (TOP KEY) PH-M22 AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM INDICATING PANEL PH-PC40 RECEIVER EMA RELAY KEY INFORMATION ALM INFORMATION Figure 2-27 Location of PH-M22 (MMC) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 71 Revision 4.0 PH-M22 MMC 2. Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below. Mounting Module 00 01 02 03 LPM 04 MMC CPRAQ-A/CPRAS-A CPRAQ-A/CPRAS-A 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-28. OPE MB CN7 CN6 CN5 CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1 CN0 KEY Figure 2-28 Face Layout of PH-M22 (MMC) CHAPTER 2 Page 72 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-M22 MMC 4. Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR OPE Green 5. STATE Lights when this circuit card is in operation. Switch Settings Switch settings on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SETTING UP MB DOWN MEANING Circuit Card make-busy × Circuit Card make-busy cancel ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 73 Revision 4.0 PH-M22 MMC 6. External Interface MMC (PH-M22) : Slot No.00 AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM INDICATING PANEL 68PH EXMISC CA LPM MDF MISC0A Connector MN (BASEU) BELL RPT Terminal on front of the BASEU REAR VIEW 01 02 03 04 05 -48V (RPT0) 01 02 03 04 05 G (RPT1) 68PH EXMISC CA and Installation Cable 68PH EXMISC CA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 MPALM EXTAA BELAA MNAA SUPAA MJAA 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 MDF BELAA MNAA SUPAA MJAA MNBA SUPBA MJBA MNBA SUPBA MJBA RPT1(G) RPT0(-48V) Figure 2-29 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel CHAPTER 2 Page 74 Revision 4.0 MJ ND-70182 (E) MJ/MN/BELL PH-M22 MMC 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME MB SWITCH SHAPE ON REMARKS Note: Normal operating mode is down. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 75 Revision 4.0 PH-M16/PH-M23 Line Test PH-M16/PH-M23 Line Test 1. General Function This circuit card controlled by CPU is used for line test of a subscriber’s line. The circuit card supports to send Howler Tone to external test equipment, besides the circuit card can detect or send various tones, and send PB (DTMF) signal for automatic trunk test. Note: A system cannot send Howler Tone during line test. The number of available lines within the line test/automatic trunk test at the same time is only one. LC TEL TSW I N T LC TEL PIM LPRA TEST EQ LTST GT CPU EXTENDED I/O BUS EXGT EXTENDED I/O BUS Figure 2-30 Location of PH-M16/PH-M23 (LTST) Card Within the System CHAPTER 2 Page 76 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-M16/PH-M23 Line Test 2. Mounting Location/Condition The LTST circuit card can be accommodated in the shaded slots (00, 01, 02) as shown below: Note: IMX: Slot 00, Slot 01, Slot 02. IMX-U: Slot 01, Slot 02 (Considering PH-M22 MMC) Mounting Module PH-M16/PH-M23 PH-M16/PH-M23 02 PH-M16/PH-M23 3. 00 01 03 LPM 04 Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-31. OPE/MB MB SW0 CRIN Figure 2-31 Face Layout of PH-M16/PH-M23 (LTST) Card Note: CRIN is used to connect with CRIN test equipment. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 77 Revision 4.0 PH-M16/PH-M23 Line Test 4. Lamp Indications LAMP NAME COLOR Green OPE/MB 5. Red DESCRIPTION This circuit card is operating in normal mode. This circuit card is Make-busy. Switch Settings SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO SETTING STANDARD SETTING UP MB MEANING Circuit card Make-busy DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel 1 ON × Setting of a condition of DT detection (440Hz+350Hz) 2 ON × Setting of a condition of RBT detection (440Hz+480Hz) 3 ON OFF × Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (133msec.) ON Setting of M-wire control which is concerned with sending test tone of ODT (Set soft control or E-wire loop-back) OFF Setting of M-wire control which is concerned with sending test tone of ODT (Set soft control only) 4 SW0 Time of PB (DTMF) signal sending (67msec.) 5 BASIC INTERVAL TIMER SW0 6 7 8 CHAPTER 2 Page 78 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) 5 6 7 8 TIME ON OFF OFF OFF 8µ ON ON OFF OFF 16µ ON ON ON OFF 32µ ON ON ON ON 64µ PH-M16/PH-M23 Line Test 6. External Interface MISC Connector Accommodation Circuit Card Backboard Connector Connector Name 02 PH-M16/PH-M23 PH-M16/PH-M23 LPM 00 01 PH-M16/PH-M23 Slot Number 03 04 LPM Backboard MISC Circuit Card Backboard Connector MISC CONNECTOR 68PH EXMISC CABLE MISC CONNECTOR 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 TE TELB LCB THOWB THOWS SE ATB OUTB TB1 INB 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 TM TELA LCA THOWA ONHK TCR ATM ATA OUTA TA1 INA Figure 2-32 LT Connector Lead Accommodation ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 79 Revision 4.0 PH-M16/PH-M23 Line Test PBX LTST TLT LC MDP TM TE OUTA OUTA INA INB TA1 TB1 E M RA RB TA TB A B Figure 2-32 Connecting Route Diagram 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ON (MB) MB OFF ON 12345678 SW0 CHAPTER 2 Page 80 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-PC36 Multiplexer PH-PC36 Multiplexer 1. General Function The PH-PC36 (MUX) circuit card is an interface card for mounting line circuits and/or trunks. In between the CPR and the Port Microprocessor (PM) of the line/trunk circuit, this circuit card provides an interface for PM control and management by the CPU. Likewise in between the TSW and the line circuit/trunks, this circuit card provides an interface for multiplexing/de-multiplexing of voice Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) information and digital data information. LC/TRK MUX PCM HW PM BUS LC/TRK MUX PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW PM BUS TSW/INT/PLO MUX PM LC/TRK MUX CPR GT PM PM LC/TRK PCM HW PM BUS PM Figure 2-33 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 1 IMG System ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 81 Revision 4.0 PH-PC36 Multiplexer PCM HW MUX TDSW 13 TDSW 03 PM BUS Line/Trunk PM PCM HW MUX PM BUS Line/Trunk PM IMG 3 PCM HW MUX PM BUS Line/Trunk PM PCM HW MUX PM BUS Line/Trunk PM PCM HW MUX TDSW 12 TDSW 02 CPR 0 ISAGT Line/Trunk PM PCM HW MUX PM BUS Line/Trunk PM IMG 2 PCM HW MUX CPR 1 ISAGT PM BUS PM BUS Line/Trunk PM PCM HW GT 1 MUX PM BUS Line/Trunk PM PCM HW MUX GT 0 TDSW 11 TDSW 01 PM BUS Line/Trunk PM PCM HW MUX PM BUS Line/Trunk PM IMG 1 PCM HW MUX PM BUS Line/Trunk PM PCM HW DLKC 1 MUX DLKC 0 PM BUS PCM HW MUX TDSW 10 TDSW 00 PM BUS PCM HW MUX PM BUS PCM HW MUX PM BUS PCM HW MUX PM BUS Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM IMG 0 Line/Trunk PM Line/Trunk PM Figure 2-34 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the 4 IMG System CHAPTER 2 Page 82 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-PC36 Multiplexer LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX00 MUX10 MUX01 MUX11 LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX02 MUX12 LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX03 MUX13 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK TSW00 TSW10 DLKC0 DLKC1 MUX LN MUX TSW01 TSW11 PLO 0 PLO 1 TSW02 TSW12 TSW03 TSW13 TSW00 HSW00 HSW10 TSW10 ISW TSW01 HSW01 HSW11 TSW11 TSW02 TSW12 TSW03 TSW13 PLO 0 PLO 1 Figure 2-35 Location of PH-PC36 (MUX) Card in the IMX-U System ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 83 Revision 4.0 PH-PC36 Multiplexer The PCM highway running is illustrated in the figure below. There are sixteen 2Mbps PCM highways (HW0 - HW15) in the PIM. Each PCM highway runs from a card slot to the MUX circuit card. For instance, highway number zero (HW0) appears in Slot 04 and also Slot 05, thus the HW0 carries the PCM of the Group 0, 1, 2 and 3. Likewise, the HW6, 7, 14, 15 cover the Groups 24 through 31. However, the time slots of Groups 24 and 25 are exclusively used for the Speech Path Memory (SPM). All highways in the PIM lead to a MUX card, so 512 time slots (32 time slots per highway × 16 highways = 512 time slots) of PCM are multiplexed/de-multiplexed at a MUX and sent/received to/from the TSW circuit card across the 32.786Mbps of the Low Voltage Differential Signaling (LVDS). Also the MUX card provides the PM bus interface. The CPR controls and administrates the PM of the line/ trunk circuit card via the TSW and the MUX. In addition, this circuit card supports 3-Party Conference (CFT) function and is equipped with eight circuits of 3-Party Conference. The CFT appear in time Slots 8 through 31 of the HW13 (Group 21 - 23). Slot number of the PIM U-A 8 circuits of CFTs Group (G) number of the LENS 22 23 19 18 23 22 13 17 21 12 16 20 20 16 12 21 15 14 6 20 10 7 4 19 11 18 8 17 9 16 5 13 15 2 15 14 10 14 3 11 8 13 0 9 6 12 1 7 4 11 MUX#1 10 MUX#0 09 21 08 23 22 07 17 06 19 18 05 5 PWR PWR 04 2 03 3 02 0 01 1 00 HW5 HW4 HW10 31 HW14 Group 24 and 25 are used for the SPM HW15 2Mbps (32 time slots) of PCM highway Figure 2-36 PCM Highway Running CHAPTER 2 Page 84 Revision 4.0 HW11 HW12 HW13 30 HW9 28 28 30 29 26 HW7 HW8 29 HW3 31 27 (25) (24) HW6 HW2 26 HW1 27 HW0 ND-70182 (E) PH-PC36 Multiplexer 2. Mounting Location/Condition For the 1 IMG system, the PH-PC36 (MUX) card is mounted in the PIM 1, 2, and 3. For the 4 IMG system, the PH-PC36 (MUX) card is required in all PIMs. Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 MUX #1 MUX #0 PIM 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-37. MUXACT MB SYNC RCLK ALM PMCLK ALM CFT OPE ON OFF 1 2 3 4 SW01 MUX Figure 2-37 Face Layout of PH-PC36 (MUX) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 85 Revision 4.0 PH-PC36 Multiplexer 4. Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR STATE MUX ACT Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state. SYNC Green Lights when 32 Mbps Frame Head (FH) synchronization is established between the MUX and TSW. RCLK ALM Red Lights when the 32 Mbps clock signals (which is supplied by TSW) loss has occurred. Lights when either the following clock signals output failure has occurred. PMCLK ALM Red CFT OPE 5. Green • 2 Mbps clock signals (which supplies to the line/trunks) • Frame Head signal • 4 Mbps clock signals Lights when the CFT circuit is valid. Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO DOWN 1 CHAPTER 2 Page 86 Revision 4.0 STANDARD SETTING UP MB SW01 SETTING 2 MEANING Circuit card Make-busy. × Circuit card Make-busy cancel. ON 3-Party Conference Function (CFT) is valid. OFF 3-Party Conference Function (CFT) is invalid. ON Setting of A-Law in the CFT function block. OFF × Setting µ-Law in the CFT function block. 3 OFF × Not used 4 OFF × Not used ND-70182 (E) PH-PC36 Multiplexer 6. External Interface For the 1 IMG system, the cable connections between the MUX and the TSW are shown in Figure 2-38. PIM 3 MT24 TDSW CA-180 MUX #0 MUX #1 PIM 2 MT24 TDSW CA-140 MUX #0 MUX #1 PIM 1 MT24 TDSW CA-90 MUX #0 MUX #1 TDSW #0 TDSW #1 PIM 0 Figure 2-38 External Interface for PH-PC36 ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 87 Revision 4.0 PH-PC36 Multiplexer The cable connections between the MUX and the TSW are shown in Figure 2-39. As seen in this illustration, the cable connected to the front of the MUX leads to the “MUX###” connector on the Back Wired Board (BWB) of the TSWM. See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual for more details. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PH-PC36(MUX) PH-PC36(MUX) PIM PIM 3 PIM 3 PIM 3 PIM 3 PIM 2 PIM 2 PIM 2 PIM 2 PIM 1 PIM 1 PIM 1 PIM 1 PIM 0 PIM 0 PIM 0 PIM 0 LPM TSWM Dummy/TSWM Dummy IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 BWB of TSWM Figure 2-39 Cable Connections between the MUX and the TSW CHAPTER 2 Page 88 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-PC36 Multiplexer 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ON MB ON SW01 12 34 ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 89 Revision 4.0 PH-PC20 Data Link Controller PH-PC20 Data Link Controller 1. General Function This circuit card simultaneously provides all the Attendant Consoles (ATTs) in the system (except the 1IMG system) with information such as the termination/answer/release (abandoned) information of ATT calls, or the station idle/busy information through the TSW system link. TSW ATTCON ISAGT0 ISAGT1 ATTCON ISA BUS CPU0 GT0 DLKC0 CPU1 GT1 MISC I/O BUS Note DLKC1 Figure 2-40 Location of PC-PH20 in the System Note: 2. MG = 01/03/05/07, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 6-7 are used to input the information into TSW by the DLKC. Mounting Location/Conditions Mounting Module TSWM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 DLKC#1 DLKC#0 CHAPTER 2 Page 90 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-PC20 Data Link Controller 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors of this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-41. OPE/MB MB PWR ALM Figure 2-41 Face Layout of the PH-PC20 Card 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR Green OPE/MB PWR ALM STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in ACT state. Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state or when the firmware is abnormal. Red Lights when the On-Board Power Supply located on this circuit card is abnormal. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 91 Revision 4.0 PH-PC20 Data Link Controller 5. Switch Settings Standard settings of various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. STANDARD SETTING UP MB 6. SETTING MEANING Circuit card Make-busy. DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel. External Interface No cable connections are required. 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ON MB CHAPTER 2 Page 92 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-PC40 Emergency Alarm Controller PH-PC40 Emergency Alarm Controller 1. General Function The PH-PC40 (EMA) circuit card detects various kinds of alarms which might occur in the system, and sends out information about the detected alarm to the circuits concerned. This circuit card can activate the system MJ/MN LEDs on the TOPU. Additionally, this card can control the active/stand-by status of the CPU in the case of dual configuration. For the 1 IMG system, this circuit card has the Music-On-Hold sending function. I/O Local Bus I/O Local Bus CPR #1 CPR #0 DSP CPU DSP GT GT CPU EMA MISC Bus # 0 IOC MISC Bus # 1 MISC Figure 2-42 Location of PH-PC40 (EMA) Card in the System ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 93 Revision 4.0 PH-PC40 Emergency Alarm Controller 2. Mounting Location/Condition The PH-PC40 (EMA) card is mounted in Slot 04 of the LPM, as shown below. Mounting Module LPM 00 01 02 03 04 PH-IO24 (IOC) 3. PH-PC40 (EMA) LPM Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-43. OPE/MB MB ACT1 CKERR1 ACT0 CKERR0 EMASUP EMASUP CPU SEL SW65 NMI SEL SW73 SW92 SW62 MRTC CPW-STAT SW70 SW A0 Figure 2-43 Face Layout of the PH-PC40 (EMA) Card CHAPTER 2 Page 94 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-PC40 Emergency Alarm Controller 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR Green OPE/MB Red ACT1 Green CKERR 1 Red ACT0 Green CKERR 0 Red Green EMSUP 5. OFF STATE Indicates the circuit card is operating normally. Indicates the circuit card is in a Make-busy state. CPU #1 is in the ACT state. CPU #1 clock failure has occurred. CPU #0 is in the ACT state. CPU #0 clock failure has occurred. Disable the CPU change-over. (When EMSUP key is set upward .) Enable to the CPU change-over. Switch Settings Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SETTING UP MEANING Make-busy of the circuit card. MB DOWN Normal setting UP EMASUP DOWN Make-busy of the CPU change-over circuit. × UP CPUSEL MIDDLE Forced activating the CPU #1. × DOWN Outputs the Non-Maskable Interruption (NMI) signal to the CPU when a fault occurs. NMISEL Note: Denial of the forced CPU selection. Note Forced activating the CPU #0. UP DOWN Normal setting × Outputs the RST (Reset) signal to the CPU when a fault occurs. Set CPUSEL switch downward, if it is single CPU system. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 95 Revision 4.0 PH-PC40 Emergency Alarm Controller SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO SETTING STANDARD SETTING ON 1 OFF × MEANING Power Shut Down (PSDN) function (used in Australia only) ON 2 OFF SW62 Note 1 × ON 3 OFF × SW62 ON OFF SW62-1 IMG#0 valid IMG0# invalid SW62-2 IMG#1 valid IMG1# invalid SW62-3 IMG#2 valid IMG2# invalid SW62-4 IMG#3 valid IMG3# invalid ON 4 OFF × ON × 1 OFF CPU-ACT Signal does not output. ON Not used 2 OFF SW65 Output the CPU-ACT Signal to the another EMA (when this circuit card is used in the one frame stack configuration). × Not used ON Dual CPU configuration OFF Single CPU configuration 3 ON × 4 PZ-DK223 (or PZ-DK173) is used for the DSPP on the TOPU. OFF PZ-DK179 is used for the DSPP on the TOPU. ON External music on hold source (FM lead) is used. OFF Internal music on hold source IC is used. ON Output the alarm information for the external indicator (used in Australia only). 1 SW70 2 OFF × Alarm information does not output. ON × Power Failure Transfer (PFT) control is valid. 1 OFF SW73 ON PFT control is invalid. × µ-law PCM CODEC is applied for the music. 2 OFF CHAPTER 2 Page 96 Revision 4.0 A-law PCM CODEC is applied for the music. ND-70182 (E) PH-PC40 Emergency Alarm Controller SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO 1 SETTING SW92-1 2 STANDARD SETTING MEANING SW92-2 Impedance of the External Music Source 0 (FM 0) OFF OFF 600 Ω ON OFF 8.2 Ω OFF ON 47K Ω SW92 Note 3 SW92-1 4 SW92-2 Impedance of the External Music Source 1 (FM 1) OFF OFF 600 Ω ON OFF 8.2 Ω OFF ON 47K Ω MUSIC CH0 selection. This selection is valid when SW70-1 is OFF. 1 SWA0-1 SWA0 Note SWA0-3 MUSIC OFF OFF OFF Für Elise ON OFF OFF Maiden’s prayer Not Used OFF ON Buzzer Not Used ON OFF Chime 2 3 SWA0-2 ON 4 OFF Not used × Not used 5 6 MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit card. 7 ON 8 OFF Note: Not used × Not used SW92 and SWA0 are used in the 1 IMG system only. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 97 Revision 4.0 PH-PC40 Emergency Alarm Controller 6. External Interface External equipment may be connected to this circuit card. The physical connection diagram for the external equipment for Music-On-Hold and External Alarm is shown in Figure 2-44. EMA (Slot No.04) EALM Connector AUDIBLE AND VISUAL ALARM INDICATING PANEL Installation Cable LPM MDF MJ MN 16PH EXALM CA (BASEU) BELL RPT Terminal on front of the BASEU REAR VIEW 01 02 03 04 05 -48V (RPT0) 01 02 03 04 05 G (RPT1) CABLING DIAGRAM 16PH EXALM CA 26 E 1 2 27 E 28 3 29 MJB 4 30 MNA 5 31 6 32 7 33 8 9 34 FM0 FM0 FM1 MPALM MJA MNA BELL E MDF EXTERNAL MUSIC SOURCE MJA MNA MJ/MN/BELL BELL MJB MNB RPT1(G) RPT0(-48V) 50 EXTA 25 EXTB CROSS CONNECTION Figure 2-44 Connection of Alarm Indicating Panel and Music on Hold CHAPTER 2 Page 98 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-PC40 Emergency Alarm Controller 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE ON MB ON EMA-SUP ON CPU-SEL ON NMI-SEL SWA0 REMARKS ON 1234 5678 12 34 ON 12 34 ON 12 ON 12 ON 12 34 ON SW62 SW65 SW70 SW73 SW92 ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 99 Revision 4.0 PH-PW14 Power Switch PH-PW14 Power Switch 1. General Function This circuit card is a power supply card that supplies DC -48 V operating power to the circuit cards mounted in the TSWM. It also provides the DC-DC converter function which generates output power DC +5V, -5 V, and +12 V to MISC slots. The two PWR SWs cards make the power supply redundant. PWR SW #0 FET Switch FUSE PWR SW #1 FUSE Load Controller -48V IN Switch DCDC DCDC Load -48V Figure 2-45 -48 V Output Circuit Diagram CHAPTER 2 Page 100 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) Controller PH-PW14 Power Switch 2. Mounting Location/Conditions This circuit card is mounted in the following shaded slots (00, 01). Mounting Module TSWM/ISWM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PWR SW#1 PWR SW#0 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors for this circuit card is shown in Figure 2-46. P-ON ALM SW -48V in Fuse (125V AC/DC 15A) Figure 2-46 Face Layout of the PH-PW14 Card ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 101 Revision 4.0 PH-PW14 Power Switch 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR P-ON Green ALM Red 5. STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Lights when SW switch is set at OFF position or it is faulty. Switch Settings Standard settings for various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING ON × The card supplies the operating power to various circuit cards. SW OFF 6. External Interface No cable connections are required. 7. Switch Setting Sheet MODULE CHAPTER 2 Page 102 Revision 4.0 SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME 00 01 SW SWITCH SHAPE ON ND-70182 (E) REMARKS -48 V operating power is supplied to various circuit cards. PH-SW10 Time Division Switch PH-SW10 Time Division Switch 1. General Function This circuit card combines the Time Division Switch (TSW) with INT, PLO, MUX, and CFT. The TSW capacity is 2048×2048 time slots, and it allows non-block switching for the maximum IMX configuration. The INT is an intermediate circuit of the CPR which controls and administrates the Port Microprocessor (PM) of line/trunk circuit cards via the PM BUS. [Connection diagram of the TSW] MUX PCM HW PM BUS LC/TRK PCM HW PM BUS LC/TRK MUX MUX PCM HW PM BUS TSW/INT/PLO CPR MUX GT [Function block diagram] From EMA MUSIC PCM HW PM BUS LVDS TSW LC/TRK LC/TRK MUX INT D T G MUX LC/TRK CFT PLO PH-SW10 DTI DCS Figure 2-47 Location of PH-SW10 (TSW) Card in the System ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 103 Revision 4.0 PH-SW10 Time Division Switch Figure 2-48 shows the clock signal routing around the Phase Locked Oscillator (PLO). OSC#1 (PA-CK14) DCS 1 PLO TSW TSW#1 (PH-SW10) DCS 0 DCS 0 DIU 0 DIU 1 DIU 2 DIU 3 DCS 1 PLO TSW TSW#0 (PH-SW10) OSC#0 (PA-CK14) Multiple connection on MDF Figure 2-48 PLO Function Diagram When the system operates as the clock source office of the digital network, the OSC (PA-CK14) card is required, and the OSC supplies the high-precision clock signals (±0.3ppm deviation) for the base clock of the PLO. When the system operates as the clock subordinate office, the TSW internal oscillator (±5ppm deviation) can be the base clock of the PLO. The source clock of the subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or the digital interface clock (DIU0 - DIU3). When the clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses another clock source automatically in the order of: 1 DCS0 2. DCS1 3. DIU0 4. DIU1 5. DIU2 6. DIU3 7. Drifting with the TSW internal oscillator CHAPTER 2 Page 104 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-SW10 Time Division Switch The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows: • 32.768MHz CLK • 8KHz FH • 5 msec × “n” FH (for wireless module). The MUX performs multiplexing/de-multiplexing of the 2 Mbps PCM highways running in PIM 0, and it sends/receives the PCM to/from the TSW, and operates like the MUX card of PIM 1/2/3. This circuit card includes the Digital Tone Generator (DTG) and hold tone (MUSIC) insertion circuit. The TONE ROM located on this circuit card contains the audible tone, and the hold tone is supplied from the EMA card. In addition, the designated time slot of PCM (Speech Path Memory: SPM) can be inserted as a tone/music voice prompt. (For example, you can join the SPM and a DAT port by the nailed down connection, and the DAT's voice prompt is given to the system instead of ordinary tone/music.) Additionally, this circuit card supports the CFT (3-Party Conference) function and is equipped with eight (8) circuits of 3-Party Conference Trunk. [Voice Prompt sending for Tone] [Voice Prompt sending for Music] Speech Path Memory TONE ROM Speech Path Memory Tone Tone source selected by office data MUSIC from EMA Music Music source selected by office data [Time Slot for Speech Path Memory] [SPM for music channel 16-29] MG=01, Unit=2, Group=24, Level=0-7 PIM 3 MG=01, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=0-5 Note [SPM for music channel 0-15] MG=01, Unit=0, Group=24, Level=0-7 PIM 2 MG=01, Unit=0, Group=25, Level=0-7 [SPM for Tone channel 16-31] MG=00, Unit=2, Group=24, Level=0-7 PIM 1 MG=00, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=0-7 [SPM for Tone channel 0-15] MG=00, Unit=0, Group=24, Level=0-7 PIM0 MG=00, Unit=0, Group=25, Level=0-7 Note: MG=01, Unit=2, Group=25, Level=6-7 are not used. Figure 2-49 Voice Prompting ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 105 Revision 4.0 PH-SW10 Time Division Switch 2. Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card is mounted in PIM0 in the slot shown below. Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 TSW #1 TSW #0 PIM0 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown below. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 TSWACT MUXACT SW11 PLOACT MB TSWMBR PLOMB SW12 M3SY M2SY M1SY M0SY PMCA CFT PMJ PMN SYNC ICK ECK SW03 SW04 MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 Figure 2-50 Face Layout of PH-SW10 (TSW) CHAPTER 2 Page 106 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-SW10 Time Division Switch 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR Green TSWACT STATE Remains lit while the TSW block is in ACT state. Red Remains lit while the TSW block is in Make-busy state. Off Remains off while the TSW block is ST-BY side. MUXACT Green Remains lit while MUX block is in ACT state. PLOACT Green Remains lit while PLO block is in ACT state. M3SY Green Lights when MUX #3 synchronization has been established. M2SY Green Lights when MUX #2 synchronization has been established. M1SY Green Lights when MUX #1 synchronization has been established. M0SY Green Lights when MUX #0 synchronization has been established. PMCA Red Lights when the PM/PCM bus clock FH failure has occurred. CFT Green Lights when the CFT circuit is valid. Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred: • All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock subordinate office PMJ Red • 32.768 MHz output clock failure • 8 KHz output FH failure • 5 msec × “n” output FH failure • Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card) • Both internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) and high-precision clock signals (±0.3 ppm deviation) have failed when the system operates as the clock source office Lights when the following MN fault has occurred: PMN Yellow • One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed • Drifting failure • Internal OSC (±5 ppm) failure • High-precision clock signals (±0.3 ppm) failure ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 107 Revision 4.0 PH-SW10 Time Division Switch LAMP NAME COLOR Green STATE Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network. Remains off when any of the following have occurred. SYNC OFF • DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS. • DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI. • Drifting failure Lights when the TSW (PA-SW10) internal oscillator is operating normally. ICK Green ECK Green Note: Lights when the high-precision clock signals are received from OSC circuit card (PACK14). Note: 5. The ICK LED will illuminate even when the internal PLO circuit is operational. The ICK LED will not illuminate when the PA-CK14 is operational. Switch Settings Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SETTING UP MB DOWN Circuit card Make-busy. × UP TSWMBR DOWN SW12 CHAPTER 2 Page 108 Revision 4.0 Circuit card Make-busy cancel. TSW Make-busy request. × UP PLOMBR MEANING TSW Make-busy request cancel. PLO Make-busy request. DOWN × PLO Make-busy request cancel. 1-F 1 Fixed to “1.” ND-70182 (E) PH-SW10 Time Division Switch SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING ON 3-Party Conference Trunk (CFT) is valid. OFF 3-Party Conference Trunk (CFT) is invalid. ON Setting of A-law in the CFT function block. 1 2 SW03 3 OFF × Setting of µ-law in the CFT function block. OFF × Fixed. Only MUX function is valid (If this card is mounted in PIM 1/2/3). Note ON 4 OFF × TSW/INT/PLO/MUX are valid (When this card is mounted in PIM 0). ON DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero. OFF DIU 0 is not used. ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one. OFF DIU 1 is not used. ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two. OFF DIU 2 is not used. ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three. OFF DIU 3 is not used. 1 2 3 4 SW04 ON × 1.5 M clock for DIU 0 5 OFF ON 2 M clock for DIU 0 × 1.5 M clock for DIU 1 6 OFF ON 2 M clock for DIU 1 × 1.5 M clock for DIU 2 7 OFF ON 2 M clock for DIU 2 × 1.5 M clock for DIU 3 8 OFF Note: 2 M clock for DIU 3 When MUX card mode (SW03-4 ON), only MUX and CFT functions are valid. MUX 1 is used for a connection to TSW (Don’t use MUX 2, 3). The LED of MUXACT, M0SY, CFT, and PMCA are valid, other LED is not lit. In the case of this mode, only SW03 is valid. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 109 Revision 4.0 PH-SW10 Time Division Switch SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING ON PLO operates as the clock subordinate office. OFF PLO operates as the clock source office. ON Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used. OFF Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used. ON Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used. OFF Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used. ON 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64KHz + 8KHz). OFF 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64KHz + 8KHz). ON When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator. OFF When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock. ON This card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card. OFF This card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card. ON (The last byte data of the DTG ROM is “FE”) 1 2 3 4 SW11 5 6 7 8 CHAPTER 2 Page 110 Revision 4.0 OFF × (The last byte data of the DTG ROM is “FF”) OFF × Not used ND-70182 (E) PH-SW10 Time Division Switch 6. External Interface When this circuit card is used in “clock subordinate office”, clock signals from DTI, CCT, PRT must be extracted. See Figure 2-52 for more information. When this circuit card is used in “clock source office” cable connections are not necessary. Mounting Module PIM 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 DCSB0 DIU0B0 DIU1B0 DIU2B0 DIU3B0 SYN0B0 SYN1B0 DCSB1 DIU0B1 DIU1B1 DIU2B1 DIU3B1 SYN0B1 SYN1B1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 DCSA0 DIU0A0 DIU1A0 DIU2A0 DIU3A0 SYN0A0 SYN1A0 DCSA1 DIU0A1 DIU1A1 DIU2A1 DIU3A1 SYN0A1 SYN1A1 Figure 2-51 PLO Connector Leads Location ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 111 Revision 4.0 PH-SW10 Time Division Switch PBX MDF CCT/DTI /PRT POUT A POUT B CCT/DTI /PRT POUT A POUT B CCT/DTI /PRT POUT A POUT B CCT/DTI /PRT POUT A TSW #0 DCSA0 DCSB0 DIU0A0 DIU0B0 DIU1A0 DIU1B0 DIU2A0 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DIU3B0 TSW #1 POUT B DCS DCSA1 DCSB1 DIU0A1 DIU0B1 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU2A1 DIU2B1 DIU3A1 DIU3B1 Note: The following circuit cards have Clock Output leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA30CCTB), DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (A-24PRT, PA-PRTC). Figure 2-52 Connecting Route Diagram CHAPTER 2 Page 112 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-SW10 Time Division Switch The front cable connections are shown in Figure 2-53. PIM 3 MT24 TDSW CA-180 MUX #0 MUX #1 PIM 2 MT24 TDSW CA-140 MUX #0 MUX #1 PIM 1 MT24 TDSW CA-90 MUX #0 MUX #1 TDSW #0 TDSW #1 PIM 0 Figure 2-53 Front Cable Connections for PH-SW10 ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 113 Revision 4.0 PH-SW10 Time Division Switch 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ON MB ON TSWMBR ON PLOMB 12 34 ON SW03 1234 5678 ON 1234 5678 ON SW04 SW11 SW12 CHAPTER 2 Page 114 Revision 4.0 1 ND-70182 (E) PH-SW12 Time Division Switch PH-SW12 Time Division Switch 1. General Function This circuit card provides the Time Division Switch (TSW) and INT function for the system. Each TSW card is capable of 8192 × 2048 Time Slot (TS) switching for an Interface Module Group (IMG). Four cards allow 8192 × 8192 TS switching for the 4 IMG configuration. The INT is an intermediate circuit of the CPR which controls and administrates the Port Microprocessor (PM) for line/trunk circuit cards. [TSW configuration] IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 TSW (8Kx2K) IMG0 TSW (8Kx2K) IMG1 TSW (8Kx2K) IMG2 TSW (8Kx2K) IMG3 [INT configuration] STBY ACT CPU1(LP) ISAGT1 ISA BUS GT1 MUX01 TSW1 (INT) I/O BUS PM BUS LC/TRK(PM) MUX00 STBY System #1 ACT STBY System #0 MUX31 ISA BUS CPU0(LP) I/O BUS ISAGT0 PM BUS TSW0 (INT) GT0 LC/TRK(PM) MUX30 STBY ACT ACT Figure 2-54 TSW Configuration ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 115 Revision 4.0 PH-SW12 Time Division Switch The TONE ROM located on this circuit card contains the audible tones, such as Dial Tone, Busy Tone, Ring Back Tone, etc. The music on hold source, either the MUSIC ROM or the external source via FM lead, is located on the PLO card. The tone and the music are inserted into their time slot at this circuit card. Additionally, this circuit card provides the Voice Prompt function that inserts the designated time slot of PCM (Speech Path Memory : SPM) into the tone or music time slot. FM SEL MUSIC ROM PLO#1 FM SEL MUSIC ROM TONE ROM PLO#0 SEL SEL TONE ROM Music/Tone Speech Path Memory for Music/Tone TDSW1 SEL SEL Music/Tone Speech Path Memory for Music/Tone TDSW00 Figure 2-55 Music/Tone Insertion CHAPTER 2 Page 116 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-SW12 Time Division Switch [SPM for music channel 16-29] MG = 01, Unit = 2, Group = 24, Level = 0-7 PIM 3 MG = 01, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 0-5 Note [SPM for music channel 0-15] MG = 01, Unit = 0, Group = 24, Level = 0-7 PIM 2 MG = 01, Unit = 0, Group = 25, Level = 0-7 [SPM for tone channel 16-31] MG = 00, Unit = 2, Group = 24, Level = 0-7 PIM 1 MG = 00, Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 0-7 [SPM for tone channel 0-15] MG = 00, Unit = 0, Group = 24, Level = 0-7 PIM0 MG = 00, Unit = 0, Group = 25, Level = 0-7 Note : MG = 01,Unit = 2, Group = 25, Level = 6-7 are exclusively used by the DLKC. Figure 2-56 Speech Path Memory (SPM) for Voice Prompt Function 2. Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below. The IMX-U system accommodates two TSWMs (TSWM0/1). Mounting Module TSWM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 TSW 13 TSW 12 TSW 11 TSW 10 TSW 03 TSW 02 TSW 01 TSW 00 TSWM ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 117 Revision 4.0 PH-SW12 Time Division Switch The definition of the TSW00 - TSW03/TSW10 - TSW13 are listed below. • 4-IMG System SYMBOL SYSTEM CONTROLLED IMG TSW00 IMG 0 TSW01 IMG 1 0 TSW02 IMG 2 TSW03 IMG 3 TSW10 IMG 0 TSW11 IMG 1 1 • TSW12 IMG 2 TSW13 IMG 3 IMX-U system This card is mounted in the TSWM0/1 for the IMX-U system. • For the card in TSWM0 SYMBOL SYSTEM FUNCTION TSW00 CONTROLLED IMG IMG 0 Collects the PCM data TSW01 IMG 1 0 TSW02 IMG 0 Sends the PCM data to the ISW TSW03 IMG 1 TSW10 IMG 0 Collects the PCM data TSW11 IMG 1 1 TSW12 IMG 0 Sends the PCM data to the ISW TSW13 • IMG 1 For the card in TSWM1 SYMBOL SYSTEM TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03 CHAPTER 2 Page 118 Revision 4.0 FUNCTION Collects the PCM data 0 Sends the PCM data to the ISW ND-70182 (E) CONTROLLED IMG IMG 2 IMG 3 IMG 2 IMG 3 PH-SW12 Time Division Switch SYMBOL SYSTEM FUNCTION TSW10 TSW11 TSW12 TSW13 3. CONTROLLED IMG IMG 2 Collects the PCM data IMG 3 1 IMG 2 Sends the PCM data to the ISW IMG 3 Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown below. TSWACT MB TSWMBR M3SY M2SY M1SY M0SY PLO 1 PLO 0 TONE Figure 2-57 Face Layout of PH-SW12 (TSW) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 119 Revision 4.0 PH-SW12 Time Division Switch 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR STATE Green TSWACT 5. Remains lit while the TSW block is in ACT state. Red Remains lit while the TSW block is in Make-busy state. Off Remains off while the TSW block is ST-BY side. M3SY Green Lights when MUX #3 synchronization has been established. M2SY Green Lights when MUX#2 synchronization has been established. M1SY Green Lights when MUX#1 synchronization has been established. M0SY Green Lights when MUX#0 synchronization has been established. PLO 1 Green Lights when the Frame Head signal and clock signals are received from the PLO 1. PLO 0 Green Lights when the Frame Head signal and clock signals are received from the PLO 0. Switch Settings Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING UP Circuit card Make-busy. MB × DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel. UP TSW Make-busy request. TSWMBR × DOWN SWITCH NAME TONE 6. TSW Make-busy request cancel. SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD SETTING 1 OFF × 2 ON OFF MEANING Fixed. (The last byte data of the DTG ROM is “FE.”) × (The last byte data of the DTG ROM is “FF.”) External Interface See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual for information about the cable connection to MUX. CHAPTER 2 Page 120 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-SW12 Time Division Switch 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ON MB ON TSWMBR TONE 12 ON ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 121 Revision 4.0 PU-SW00 Time Division Switch PU-SW00 Time Division Switch 1. General Function The PU-SW00 circuit card provides the Time division Switch (TSW) and INT function for the IMX-U system. Each circuit card provides switching for a Local Node (LN) and four PU-SW00 cards and two PUSW01 (HSW) cards achieve a maximum of 32,768 time slot (TS) switching for four (4) LNs. This circuit card is located in ISWM of the ISW. TSW Configuration 32M SERIAL HW 2M PCM HW x8 MUX00 MUX10 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 MUX02 MUX12 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 MUX03 MUX13 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK MUX11 LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK MUX01 LC/TRK 32M TSW Matrix HW TSW00 TSW10 LC/TRK 32M TSW Matrix HW LC/TRK DLKC0 DLKC1 MUX MUX TSW01 TSW11 32.768MHz Clock DCS PLO 0 32.768MHz Clock DCS PLO 1 TSW02 TSW12 32M SERIAL HW x4 TSW03 TSW13 32M SERIAL HW x4 32M SERIAL HW x4 32M SERIAL HW x4 TSW00 HSW00 HSW10 TSW10 TSW01 HSW01 HSW11 TSW11 TSW02 TSW12 TSW03 TSW13 64KHz Clock PLO 0 32.768MHz Clock 32.768MHz Clock Figure 2-58 Location of PU-SW00 (TSW) (1/2) CHAPTER 2 Page 122 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PLO 1 64KHz Clock PU-SW00 Time Division Switch [INT Configuration] ISWM RES RES HSW01 HSW11 HSW00 HSW10 TSW03 TSW13 TSW02 TSW12 TSW01 TSW11 TSW00 TSW10 PLO 1 TSW I/O BUS TSW I/O BUS PLO 0 RES IOGT1 IOGT0 ISAGT BUS RES LPM ISAGT BUS MISC LANI CPU LANI ISAGT LANI IOC ISAGT CPU LANI EMA MISC I/O BUS Figure 2-59 Location of PU-SW00 (TSW) (2/2) 2. Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below. Mounting Module ISWR 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 TSW (13) TSW (12) TSW (11) TSW (10) TSW (03) TSW (02) TSW (01) TSW (00) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 123 Revision 4.0 PU-SW00 Time Division Switch 3. Face Layout of lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 2-60. TSWACT TSW MB TSW MBR PWPALM HCKALM LN33 LN32 LN31 LN30 1 2 3 4 LN23 LN22 LN21 LN20 LN13 LN12 LN11 LN10 LN03 LN02 LN01 LN00 SWE5 Figure 2-60 Face Layout of PU-SW00 (TSW) 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR Green STATE Lights when the TDSW block is active. TSWACT Red Lights when the TDSW block is in Make-busy state. PWPALM Red Lights when the On-Board Power Supply (+5V) for this circuit card is abnormal. HCKALM Red Lights when clock failure (clock down or FH output failure) occurs on the HSW card. LN33 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN. LN32 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN. LN31 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN. LN30 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN. CHAPTER 2 Page 124 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PU-SW00 Time Division Switch LAMP NAME COLOR LN23 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN. LN22 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN. LN21 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN. LN20 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN. LN13 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN. LN12 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN. LN11 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN. LN10 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN. LN03 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN. LN02 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN. LN01 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN. LN00 Green Lights when this circuit card is synchronized with the corresponding TSW/MUX of LN. 5. STATE Switch Settings Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING UP Circuit card Make-busy. TSW MB × DOWN Circuit card Make-busy cancel. UP Circuit card Make-busy request. TSW MBR × DOWN SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 SWE5 6. Circuit card Make-busy request cancel. SETTING STANDARD SETTING ON × MEANING Local Node connection mode. OFF MUX connection mode. 2 OFF × Not used 3 OFF × Not used 4 OFF × Not used External Interface See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 125 Revision 4.0 PU-SW00 Time Division Switch 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ON TSW MB ON TSW MBR CHAPTER 2 Page 126 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PU-SW01 Highway Switch PU-SW01 Highway Switch 1. General Function The PU-SW01 circuit card, which is used for the IMX-U system, supports the following functions. (a) The switch composition is T-T-S-T (T: Time division, S: Space division, T: Time division), and the space division is composed with this circuit card. (b) This circuit card collects the 16 highways of PCM data from and sends 8 highways to TSW by one card. It is used to perform 16 highways switching by 2 PU-SW01 cards. TSW Configuration 32M SERIAL HW 2M PCM HW x8 MUX00 MUX10 MUX01 MUX11 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 MUX02 MUX12 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 MUX03 MUX13 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK 2M PCM HW x8 LC/TRK LC/TRK 32M TSW Matrix HW TSW00 TSW10 LC/TRK 32M TSW Matrix HW LC/TRK DLKC0 DLKC1 MUX MUX TSW01 TSW11 32.768MHz Clock DCS PLO 0 32.768MHz Clock DCS PLO 1 TSW02 TSW12 32M SERIAL HW x4 TSW03 TSW13 32M SERIAL HW x4 32M SERIAL HW x4 32M SERIAL HW x4 TSW00 HSW00 HSW10 TSW10 TSW01 HSW01 HSW11 TSW11 TSW02 TSW12 TSW03 TSW13 64KHz Clock PLO 0 32.768MHz Clock 32.768MHz Clock PLO 1 64KHz Clock Figure 2-61 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) (1/2) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 127 Revision 4.0 PU-SW01 Highway Switch [INT Configuration] ISWM RES RES HSW01 HSW11 HSW00 HSW10 TSW03 TSW13 TSW02 TSW12 TSW01 TSW11 TSW00 TSW10 PLO 1 TSW I/O BUS TSW I/O BUS PLO 0 RES IOGT1 IOGT0 ISAGT BUS CPU ISAGT IOC LANI ISAGT EMA MISC I/O BUS Figure 2-61 Location of PU-SW01 (HSW) (2/2) CHAPTER 2 Page 128 Revision 4.0 LPM ISAGT BUS MISC LANI LANI RES ND-70182 (E) CPU LANI PU-SW01 Highway Switch 2. Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card is mounted in ISWM located in the ISW. The mounted slots are the shaded parts shown below. Mounting Module ISWM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 HSW (11) HSW (10) HSW (01) HSW (00) 3. Face Layout of lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 2-62. HSWACT MB PWRALM CKALF CKALE CKALD CKALC CKALB CKALA CKAL9 CKAL8 CKAL7 CKAL6 CKAL5 CKAL4 CKAL3 CKAL2 CKAL1 CKAL0 Figure 2-62 Face Layout of PU-SW01 (HSW) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 129 Revision 4.0 PU-SW01 Highway Switch 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR Green STATE Lights when the HSW block is active. HSWACT PWPALM Red Lights when the HSW block is in Make-busy state. Red Lights when the On-Board Power Supply (-48 V) for this circuit card is abnormal. Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #15 circuit of TSW in ISW. CKALF Off Green Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #15 circuit of TSW in ISW. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #14 circuit of TSW in ISW. CKALE Off Green Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #14 circuit of TSW in ISW. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #13 circuit of TSW in ISW. CKALD Off Green Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #13 circuit of TSW in ISW. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #12 circuit of TSW in ISW. CKALC Off Green Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #12 circuit of TSW in ISW. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #11 circuit of TSW in ISW. CKALB Off Green Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #11 circuit of TSW in ISW. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #10 circuit of TSW in ISW. CKALA Off Green Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #10 circuit of TSW in ISW. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #09 circuit of TSW in ISW. CKAL9 Off Green Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #09 circuit of TSW in ISW. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #08 circuit of TSW in ISW. CKAL8 Off Green Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #08 circuit of TSW in ISW. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #07 circuit of TSW in ISW. CKAL7 Off Green Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #07 circuit of TSW in ISW. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #06 circuit of TSW in ISW. CKAL6 Off Green Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #06 circuit of TSW in ISW. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #05 circuit of TSW in ISW. CKAL5 Off Green Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #05 circuit of TSW in ISW. Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #04 circuit of TSW in ISW. CKAL4 Off CHAPTER 2 Page 130 Revision 4.0 Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #04 circuit of TSW in ISW. ND-70182 (E) PU-SW01 Highway Switch LAMP NAME COLOR Green STATE Lights when the clock signal is sent normally from #03 circuit of TSW in ISW. CKAL3 Off Goes off when the clock failure occurs on #03 circuit of TSW in ISW. Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #02 circuit of TSW in ISW. CKAL2 Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #02 circuit of TSW in ISW. Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #01 circuit of TSW in ISW. CKAL1 Off Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #01 circuit of TSW in ISW. Green Lights when the clock/Frame Head signals are sent from #00 circuit of TSW in ISW. CKAL0 Off 5. Goes off when the clock/Frame Head signals are not sent from #00 circuit of TSW in ISW. Switch Settings Switch settings on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SETTING UP Circuit card Make-busy. MB DOWN 6. MEANING × Circuit card Make-busy cancel. External Interface No cable connections are required. 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ON MB ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 131 Revision 4.0 PZ-GT13 Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway PZ-GT13 Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway 1. General Function The PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) circuit card controls the TSDW, DLKC, PLO etc. using the PH-GT09 (GT) in the TSWM. This card also provides the MISC I/O bus interface, which permits a microprocessor on the CPR to control EMA and IOC/MISC. The Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus is used to connect this circuit card onto the CPR. PLO1 PLO0 TSW13 TDSW I/O Local Bus TSW03 TDSW I/O Local Bus TSW12 TSW02 TSW11 TSW01 TSW10 TSW00 MISC DLKC0 DLKC1 GT GT DSP To HUB LANI CPU DSP ISAGT ISAGT CPR #0 To HUB CPU EMA MISC I/O Bus IOC/ MISC Figure 2-63 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) CHAPTER 2 Page 132 Revision 4.0 To HUB LANI To HUB CPR #1 LANI MISC I/O Bus LANI ND-70182 (E) PZ-GT13 Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway ISWM RES RES HSW01 HSW11 HSW00 HSW10 TSW03 TSW13 TSW02 TSW12 TSW01 TSW11 TSW00 TSW10 PLO 1 TSW I/O BUS TSW I/O BUS PLO 0 (IOGT0) PH-GT10 RES (IOGT1) PH-GT10 ISAGT BUS LPM ISAGT BUS MISC LANI LANI RES (ISAGT) PZ-GT13 CPU IOC LANI (ISAGT) PZ-GT13 CPU LANI EMA MISC I/O BUS Figure 2-64 Location of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) in the IMX-U System (ISW) 2. Mounting Location/Condition The PZ-GT13 is located on the ISA bus, which is allocated in the CPR as shown below. Mounting Module LPM PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) PZ-PC19 (LANI) PZ-PW92 (PWR) CPU BOARD PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD) PZ-DK224 (DSP) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 133 Revision 4.0 PZ-GT13 Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway 3. Face Layout of Connectors The face layout of connectors is shown Figure 2-65. Neither lamps nor switches are located on this circuit card. ISA BUS INTERFACE PWG FRONT VIEW Figure 2-65 Face Layout of PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) 4. External Interface This card has no lamps. 5. Switch Settings No switch settings are required. 6. External Interface See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual. 7. Switch Setting Sheet No switch settings are required. CHAPTER 2 Page 134 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) DSPP CONN A B PZ-GT16 Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway PZ-GT16 Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway 1. General Function The PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) circuit card provides both the I/O Local bus and the MISC bus interface, which permits a microprocessor on the CPR to control the lower echelons of circuit cards. The Industrial Standard Architecture (ISA) bus is used to connect this circuit card onto the CPR. TSW TSW I/O Local Bus I/O Local Bus DSP DSP To HUB LANI To HUB LANI CPU ISAGT ISAGT CPR#0 CPU LANI To HUB LANI To HUB CPR#1 MISC Bus MISC Bus EMA IOC/ MISC Figure 2-66 Location of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 135 Revision 4.0 PZ-GT16 Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway 2. Mounting Location/Condition The PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) is located on the ISA bus, which is allocated in the CPR as shown below. Mounting Module LPM PZ-GT16 (GT) PZ-PC19 (LANI) PZ-PW92 (PWR) CPU BOARD PZ-DK224 (DSP) PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD) CHAPTER 2 Page 136 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PZ-GT16 Industrial Standard Architecture Gateway 3. Face Layout of Connectors The face layout of connectors is shown in Figure 2-67. There are no lamps or switches on this circuit card. ISA BUS INTERFACE PWG DSPP CONN A B FRONT VIEW Figure 2-67 Face Layout of PZ-GT16 (ISAGT) 4. Lamp Indications This card contains no lamps. 5. Switch Settings No switch settings are required. 6. External Interface See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual. 7. Switch Setting Sheet No switch settings are required. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 137 Revision 4.0 PZ-GT20 Industry Standard Architecture Gateway PZ-GT20 Industry Standard Architecture Gateway 1. General Function The main function of the PZ-GT20 circuit card is to connect the Industry Standard Architecture (ISA) bus located on the CPU and the Local I/O bus, permitting the microprocessor on the CPU to control the TSW, MUX cards of IMG2, 3 via the PH-GT09 card in the TSWM1. This circuit card is used for the IMX-U system. TSW03 TSW13 TSW02 TSW12 TSW01 TSW11 TSW00 TSW10 CLK 1 TSW I/O BUS TSW I/O BUS CLK 0 PH-GT09 (IOGT0) PH-GT09 (IOGT1) TSWM#1 (IMG2) TSW03 TSW13 TSW02 TSW12 TSW01 TSW11 TSW00 TSW10 PLO 1 PLO 0 MISC GT-BUS ISA BUS PH-GT09 GT-BUS (IOGT1) TSWM#0 (IMG1) PH-GT09 (IOGT0) PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) ISA BUS LANI LANI LANI CPU#0 PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) EMA PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) CPU#1 LANI IOC/MISC LPM (IMG0) Figure 2-68 Location of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) CHAPTER 2 Page 138 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PZ-GT20 Industry Standard Architecture Gateway 2. Mounting Location/Condition The PZ-GT20 resides on the ISA bus that is located in the CPR as shown below. Mounting Module LPM(IMG0) PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) PZ-GT13 (ISAGT) PZ-PC19 (LANI) PZ-PW92 (PWR) CPU BOARD PZ-DK224 (DSP) PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD) 3. Face Layout of Connectors The face layout of connectors are shown in Figure 2-69. Neither lamps nor switches are located on this circuit card. ISA BUS INTERFACE Figure 2-69 Face Layout of PZ-GT20 (ISAGT) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 139 Revision 4.0 PZ-GT20 Industry Standard Architecture Gateway 4. External Interface This card contains no lamps. 5. Switch Settings No switch settings are required. 6. External Interface See the NEAX2400 IMX Installation Manual. 7. Switch Setting Sheet No switch settings are required. CHAPTER 2 Page 140 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PZ-PC19 Local Area Network Interface PZ-PC19 Local Area Network Interface 1. General Function The PZ-PC19 (LANI) circuit card provides the interface for the 10-BASE-T and the Peripheral Component Interconnect (PCI) Bus. The microprocessor on the CPR sends/receives the Fusion Link Data and/or Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT) data across the LAN interface (LANI). To another Fusion Node FCCH DTI DTI FCCH HUB HUB 10-BASE-T DSP CPU LANI DSP ISAGT ISAGT CPU LANI LANI LANI CPR #0 CPR #1 PCI 10-BASE-T HUB MAT IMX NIC Figure 2-70 Location of PZ-PC19 (LANI) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 141 Revision 4.0 PZ-PC19 Local Area Network Interface 2. Mounting Location/Condition The PZ-PC19 (LANI) is located on the PCI bus in the CPR as shown below. Mounting Module LPM PZ-GT13/GT16 (ISAGT) PZ-PC19 (LANI) PZ-PW92 (PWR) CPU BOARD PZ-DK224 (DSP) PZ-IO27 (FDD/HDD) 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown in Figure 2-71. PCI BUS INTERFACE 10 BASE-T EST0 EST1 EST2 EST3 Figure 2-71 Face Layout of PZ-PC19 CHAPTER 2 Page 142 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PZ-PC19 Local Area Network Interface 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR EST0 Green Layer 1 link has established. EST1 Green Data packet sending/receiving. EST2 Red EST3 Yellow 5. DESCRIPTION Layer 1 link failure. Data packet collision has occurred. Switch Settings No switch settings are required. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 2 Page 143 Revision 4.0 PZ-PC19 Local Area Network Interface 6. External Interface FCH 24DTR DTI HUB FCH CN2 10AL (10)FLT CA 10 BASE-T straight Cable PZ-PC19(LANI) HUB TO IMX MAT 10 BASE-T straight Cable 7. Switch Setting Sheet No switch settings are required. CHAPTER 2 Page 144 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) 10 BASE-T straight Cable CHAPTER 3 LINE/TRUNK CIRCUIT CARD REFERENCE 1. General This chapter explains the following items about circuit cards. • General Function Explains the general function and purpose for each control circuit card. • Mounting Location/Condition Explains the mounting location (mounting module name and slot number, etc.) of each circuit card. If there are any conditions pertaining to mounting the circuit cards, they are also explained. • Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The locations of the lamps, switches, and connectors provided on each circuit card are illustrated by a face layout. • Lamp Indications Names, colors, and indication states of lamps mounted on each circuit card are listed. • Switch Settings Each circuit card’s switches are listed with their names, switch numbers, setting and its meaning, standard setting, etc. • External Interface If the lead outputs of the circuit card are provided by an LT connector, the relation between the mounting slots and the LT connectors is illustrated by an LT Connector Lead Face Layout. If the lead outputs are provided by other than an LT connector, or are provided by the circuit card front connector, the connector lead locations and the connecting routes are shown. In addition, a Switch Setting Sheet is provided at the end of the explanation of circuit cards. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 145 Revision 4.0 PA-CFTB 8-party Conference Trunk PA-CFTB 8-party Conference Trunk 1. General Function The PA-CFTB (CFT) circuit card provides an interface for establishing a conference, which is made up of a maximum of eight parties. A maximum of seven Tie Lines can participate in a conference when the associated trunks can receive an answer signal and a release signal from the distant switching system. On the other hand, in the case of a C.O. line, one C.O. line can be connected even if the public switching system cannot send an answer signal and/or release signal. Note that a Tie Line and a C.O. Line cannot take part in a conference at the same time. The card adopts “N-1 addition” method for establishing a conference. Note: This circuit card is used for following features: • Station-Controlled Conference (Refer to Feature Programming Manual) [S-56] • Attendant-Controlled Conference (Refer to Feature Programming Manual) [A-2] • Add On Conference-8 Party (Refer to Feature Programming Manual) [A-121] • Group Call-Automatic Conference (20-party) (Refer to Wireless System Manual) This diagram shows an example of a “Preset” conference involving Tie Line connections. INT SW INT PA-CFTB CH 7 Answer/Release Signal → TLT 6 NETWORK 5 2 Conferee VPROC 3 LC PCM INT 4 TLT 1 0 LC Conference Originator Local I/O Bus CPU GT PCM INT: PCM Interface VPROC: Voice Processor Block Figure 3-1 Location of PA-CFTB (CFT) within the System CHAPTER 3 Page 146 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-CFTB 8-party Conference Trunk 2. Mounting Location/Condition The PA-CFTB (CFT) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below. Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Note: Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 147 Revision 4.0 PA-CFTB 8-party Conference Trunk 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-2. OPE N-OPE SW2 MB SW1 SW0 BL7 BL0 Figure 3-2 Face Layout of PA-CFTB (CFT) 4. Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR OPE Green N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in make-busy state. BL0 Red BL-lamp remains lit while the corresponding circuit is busy. Flash BL-lamp flashes when the corresponding circuit is busy. STATE ~ Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. BL7 CHAPTER 3 Page 148 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-CFTB 8-party Conference Trunk 5. Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD SETTING UP MB MEANING Circuit card make busy DOWN × Circuit card make busy cancel ON × Fixed in the system × Fixed in the system × Fixed in the system × Fixed in the system × Fixed in the system × Fixed in the system × Fixed in the system × Fixed in the system 1 OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON SW0 4 OFF 12345678 ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 149 Revision 4.0 PA-CFTB 8-party Conference Trunk SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD SETTING ON × Fixed in the system × Fixed in the system × Fixed in the system × Fixed in the system × Fixed in the system × Fixed in the system × Fixed in the system OFF × Fixed in the system ON × µ-law PCM encoder 1 MEANING OFF ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON SW1 4 OFF 12345678 ON 5 OFF ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 1 OFF A-law PCM encoder ON Conference connection is set up by PB tel. OFF Conference connection is not set up by PB tel. ON When port Microprocessor (PM) is SP-388, SP-457, SP-863, SP-990, SP-1114. OFF When Port Microprocessor (PM) is SP-519, SP-1141. 2 SW2 12345678 3 CHAPTER 3 Page 150 Revision 4.0 4 OFF × Not used 5 OFF × Not used 6 OFF × Not used ND-70182 (E) PA-CFTB 8-party Conference Trunk SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING CFTB Insertion Loss (PAD value) Setting ON 7 SW2-7 SW2-8 PAD [dB] OFF OFF 0 OFF ON 3 ON OFF 6 ON ON 9 OFF SW2 ON 8 OFF 6. Switch Setting Sheet MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE ON REMARKS 12345678 SW0 ON 12345678 SW1 PIM ON 12345678 SW2 MB DOWN ND-70182 (E) Circuit card make busy cancel CHAPTER 3 Page 151 Revision 4.0 PA-CK14 Oscillator PA-CK14 Oscillator 1. General Function The PLO block of the TSW card generates its base clock signals, and adjusts their phase with the source clock signals so the PLO can send the synchronized clock signals to the TSW. When the 1 IMG system is a clock-subordinate-office of the digital network, the base clock accuracy of the PLO/ PH-SW10 (±5 ppm deviation) is sufficient. However, the more high-precision base clock signals are required at the clocksource-office, as this circuit card provides --- PA-CK14 (±0.3 ppm deviation). When this circuit card is mounted, the 1 IMG system selects the PA-CK14 (OSC) clocks as the base clock of the PLO. DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 1 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 2 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 3 CLOCK SOURCE DSC 0 DSC 1 BWB BWB DSC1 SEL SEL DSC0 OSC OSC PLO SEL PLO SEL FRONT CABLES TDSW MUX0 FRONT CABLES TDSW MUX1 MUX2 MUX3 MUX0 MUX1 MUX2 BWB BWB LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK LC/TRK Figure 3-3 Location of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card in the System CHAPTER 3 Page 152 Revision 4.0 MUX3 ND-70182 (E) LC/TRK PA-CK14 Oscillator 2. Mounting Location/Condition The PA-CK14 (OSC) is located in PIM0. The card mounted in Slot 09 works as the primary OSC, 17 for the secondary OSC. Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 OSC#1 OSC#0 PIM0 Note: 3. This card occupies two slots. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown below. CLKOUT 0 CLKOUT 1 MB Figure 3-4 Face Layout of PA-CK14 (OSC) Card ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 153 Revision 4.0 PA-CK14 Oscillator 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR CLKOUT0 Green Lights when OSC card delivers the clock signals to TSW#0. CLKOUT1 Green Lights when OSC card delivers the clock signals to TSW#1. 5. STATE Switch Settings Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SETTING ON Make-busy of the circuit card. MB × OFF 6. MEANING Normal setting. External Interface Since the base clock signals are delivered through the printed-wiring on the Back Wired Board (BWB) of PIM 0, this circuit card does not require any external cabling. 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ON MB CHAPTER 3 Page 154 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator 1. General Function This circuit card, used together with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization with the network. With this circuit card, the 4 IMG system can be a clock subordinate office of the digital network. As seen in the figure below, the PLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching network selection. DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 1 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 2 CLOCK SOURCE DCS 1 DTI 3 CLOCK SOURCE DCS 0 MDF MDF 34PH EXCLK CA-A 34PH EXCLK CA-A BWB BWB SEL SEL OSC PLL OSC PLO #0 PLO #1 BWB TDSW00 PLL BWB TDSW01 TDSW02 TDSW03 TDSW10 TDSW11 TDSW12 TDSW13 Figure 3-5 Location of PH-CK16 (PLO) Card in the System ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 155 Revision 4.0 PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator The source clock of the clock subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or the digital interface clock (DIU0 - DIU3). When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses another clock source automatically in the order of: 1. DCS 2. DIU0 3. DIU1 4. DIU2 5. DIU3 6. PLO changeover or the PLO internal oscillator drifting The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows: • 32.768 MHz CLK • 8 KHz FH • 5 msec × “n” FH CHAPTER 3 Page 156 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator The MUSIC ROM located on this circuit card also contains the hold tone, and is supplied to the TSW circuit card. When an external music on hold is applied to the 4 IMG system, this circuit card provides the interface for the external hold tone source. FM SEL MUSIC ROM PLO#1 FM SEL MUSIC ROM TONE ROM PLO#0 SEL SEL TONE ROM Music/Tone Speech Path Memory for Music/Tone TDSW1 SEL SEL Music/Tone Speech Path Memory for Music/Tone TDSW00 Figure 3-6 Music Source ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 157 Revision 4.0 PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator 2. Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below. Mounting Module TSWM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown below. 1 2 3 4 SW8F ACT SWAC SWAB MB 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MJ MN SYNC ICK PALM SW01 SW02 SW03 Figure 3-7 Face Layout of PH-CK16 (PLO) CHAPTER 3 Page 158 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PLO 1 PLO 0 3. PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR Green ACT Off STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state. Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state. Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred: • All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock subordinate office MJ Red • 32.768 MHz output clock failure • 8 KHz output FH failure • 5 msec × “n” output FH failure • Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card) • Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the clock source office Lights when the following MN fault has occurred: MN Red Green • One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed • Drifting failure • Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) failure Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network. Remains off when either of the following has occurred: SYNC OFF ICK Green PALM Red 5. • DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS. • DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI. • Drifting failure Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally. Remains lit when power is abnormal. Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SETTING UP MB SW03 MEANING Circuit card Make-busy. DOWN × Circuit card Make-busy cancel. 1-F 1 Fixed to “1." ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 159 Revision 4.0 PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 2 3 SETTING STANDARD SETTING ON × Clock source office. ON Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used. OFF Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used. ON Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used. OFF Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used. ON 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). OFF 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). ON When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator. OFF When clock source failure has not occurred in all supply routes, the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock. ON This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card. OFF This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card. ON A-law CODEC is used for the hold music. SW01 5 6 8 CHAPTER 3 Page 160 Revision 4.0 Clock subordinate office. OFF 4 7 MEANING OFF × µ-law CODEC is used for the hold music. OFF × Not used ND-70182 (E) PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 2 3 4 SW02 5 6 7 8 SWAC 1 2 1 2 STANDARD SETTING SETTING MEANING ON DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero. OFF DIU 0 is not used. ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one. OFF DIU 1 is not used. ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two. OFF DIU 2 is not used. ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three. OFF DIU 3 is not used. × ON 1.5 M clock for DIU 0 OFF 2 M clock for DIU 0 × ON 1.5 M clock for DIU 1 OFF 2 M clock for DIU 1 × ON 1.5 M clock for DIU 2 OFF 2 M clock for DIU 2 × ON 1.5 M clock for DIU 3 OFF 2 M clock for DIU 3 ON External hold tone source is used via FM lead. OFF × MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone. OFF × Not used SW8F-1 SW8F-2 Impedance of the External Music Source 0 (FM 0) OFF OFF 600 Ω ON OFF 8.2 Ω OFF ON 47K Ω SW8F 3 4 SW8F-3 SW8F-4 Impedance of the External Music Source 1 (FM 1) OFF OFF 600 Ω ON OFF 8.2 Ω OFF ON 47K Ω ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 161 Revision 4.0 PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING 1 SWA0-1 SWA0-2 SWA0-3 MUSIC OFF OFF OFF Für Elise ON OFF OFF Maiden’s prayer Not used OFF ON Buzzer Not used ON OFF Chime 2 3 SWAB 4 ON OFF Not used × Not used 5 6 MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit card. 7 8 CHAPTER 3 Page 162 Revision 4.0 ON OFF Not used × Not used ND-70182 (E) PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator 6. External Interface When this circuit card is located in the TSWM, connect 34PH EXCLK CA-A to the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors on the backplane of the TSWM. TSWM Mounting Module 34PH EXCLK CA-A LEAD ACCOMMODATION 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 REAR VIEW TSWM EXCLK1 (Slot No.23) EXCLK0 (Slot No.21) FM 1 FM 0 SYN 1B SYN 0B DIU 3B DIU 2B DIU 1B DIU 0B DCS B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 E E SYN 1A SYN 0A DIU 3A DIU 2A DIU 1A DIU 0A DCS A 34PH EXCLK CA-A MDF Installation Cable To Digital Interface and/or DCS 34PH EXCLK CA-A Slot No. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PLO #1 PLO #0 TSWM FRONT VIEW Figure 3-8 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 163 Revision 4.0 PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator PBX MDF CCT /DTI /PRT POUT A POUT B CCT /DTI /PRT POUT A POUT B CCT /DTI /PRT POUT A POUT B CCT /DTI /PRT POUT A POUT B PLO #0 DCSA0 DCSB0 DIU0A0 DIU0B0 DIU1A0 DIU1B0 DIU2A0 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DIU3B0 DCS DCSA1 PLO #1 DCSB1 DIU0A1 DIU0B1 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU2A1 DIU2B1 DIU3A1 DIU3B1 Note : The following circuit cards have Clock Output Leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA-30CCTB), DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (PA-24PRT, PA-30PRTC). Figure 3-9 Connecting Route Diagram CHAPTER 3 Page 164 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-CK16 Phase Lock Oscillator 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ON MB 1234 5678 ON 1234 5678 ON SW01 SW02 SW03 SWAC SW8F 12 1234 ON ON 1234 5678 ON SWAB ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 165 Revision 4.0 PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator 1. General Function This circuit card, used together with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization. With this circuit card, the system can be a clock subordinate office of the digital network. As seen in the figure below, the PLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching network selection. This circuit card is used for the IMX-U system. CHAPTER 3 Page 166 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator DTI0 1 2 3 DCS0 (MDF) PLO 0 ISW OSC DCS1 PLO 1 64K+8K OSC (BWB) SEL SEL CLK, FH, WFH ACT, ALM PLL PLL (BWB) Drv Drv 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT (BWB) 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT (BWB) HSW00 TSW00 HSW01 ~ TSW03 HSW11 HSW10 64K+FH, WFH TSW ACT (Cable) 64K+FH, WFH TSW ACT (Cable) TSW10 ~ TSW13 from LN DTI from LN DTI LN0 (IMG0/IMG1) PLO 0 (TSWM0) PLO 0 (TSWM0) PLO 1 (TSWM0) LN3 (IMG0/IMG1) PLO 1 (TSWM0) 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT TSW 00~03 TSW 10~13 MUX (System0) MUX (System1) ~ TSW 00~03 TSW 10~13 MUX (System0) MUX (System1) LC/TRK LC/TRK LN0 (IMG2/IMG3) CLK0 (TSWM1) CLK1 (TSWM1) CLK0 (TSWM1) CLK1 (TSWM1) 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT LN3 (IMG2/IMG3) 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT TSW 00~03 TSW 10~13 MUX (System0) MUX (System1) ~ LC/TRK TSW 00~03 TSW 10~13 MUX (System0) MUX (System1) LC/TRK Figure 3-10 Location of PH-CK16-A (PLO) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 167 Revision 4.0 PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator 2. Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below. Mounting Module ISWM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 PLO (#1) PLO (#0) Mounting Module TSWM0 (IMG1) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 ND-70182 (E) PLO (#1) PLO (#0) CHAPTER 3 Page 168 Revision 4.0 PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-11. OPE MB MJ MN SYNC ICK 1 2 3 4 SW11 CKPKG ALM0 ALM1 PALM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW12 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3. SW01 SW02 SW03 Figure 3-11 Face Layout of PH-CK16-A (PLO) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 169 Revision 4.0 PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below: LAMP NAME COLOR OPE Green STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state. Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred: MJ Red • All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock subordinate office • 32.768 MHz output clock failure (including CLK card) • 8 KHz output clock failure (including CLK card) • Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card) Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the clock source office Lights when the following MN fault has occurred: MN Red • One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply route has failed • Drifting failure • Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) failure SYNC Green Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network. ICK Green Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally. CKPKG Note Green Lights when the CLK card in TSWM1 is in normal operation. ALM0 Note Red Lights when clock failure has occurred in the CLK card. ALM1 Note Red Lights when FH failure has occurred in the CLK card. PALM Red Remains lit when the On-Board Power Supply is abnormal. Note: 5. This lamp is effective when this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IMX-U system. Switch Settings Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SETTING UP MB SW03 CHAPTER 3 Page 170 Revision 4.0 MEANING Circuit card Make-busy. DOWN × Circuit card Make-busy cancel. 1-F 1 Fixed to “1." ND-70182 (E) PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 2 3 SETTING ON STANDARD SETTING × Note 1 OFF ON × Note 1 × Note 1 Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used. ON 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). × Note 1 5 × Note 1 6 Note: When clock source failure has not occurred, the PLO keeps on outputting the current phase clock. × OFF ON 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator. ON 8 Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used. OFF OFF 7 Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used. Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used. 4 SW01 Note Clock subordinate office. Clock source office. OFF ON MEANING This circuit card i s associated with SYNC (PA-CK11) card. OFF This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK16 WCS) card. ON A-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold. OFF × µ-law CODEC is used for Music-on-Hold. OFF × Fixed OFF (Not used). When this card is used in the 4-IMG or ISWM of the IMX-U system, specify the clock source (DCS or DTI) according to the clock network configuration for the office. Note 1: This standard setting is applicable when this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IMX-U system. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 171 Revision 4.0 PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 2 3 4 SW02 Note 5 6 7 8 1 SW10 2 Note: SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING ON DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero. OFF DIU 0 is not used. ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one. OFF DIU 1 is not used. ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two. OFF DIU 2 is not used. ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three. OFF DIU 3 is not used. ON × OFF ON 2 M clock for DIU 0. × OFF ON 1.5 M clock for DIU 1. 2 M clock for DIU 1. × OFF ON 1.5 M clock for DIU 0. 1.5 M clock for DIU 2. 2 M clock for DIU 2. × 1.5 M clock for DIU 3. OFF 2 M clock for DIU 3. ON External hold tone source is used via FM lead. OFF × MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone. ON CLK card is not used. OFF CLK card is used. When this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IMX-U system, the DCS clock from the ISW is used. The DTI clock can also be used as an alternate clock supply route in case of DCS clock failure. CHAPTER 3 Page 172 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. STANDARD SETTING SETTING SW11-1 1 2 MEANING Impedance of the External Music Source 0 (FM 0) SW11-2 OFF OFF 600 Ω ON OFF 8.2 Ω OFF ON 47K Ω SW11 SW11-3 3 4 1 OFF OFF 600 Ω ON OFF 8.2 Ω OFF ON 47K Ω SW12-1 2 3 Impedance of the External Music Source 1 (FM 1) SW11-4 SW12-2 SW12-3 MUSIC OFF OFF OFF Für Elise ON OFF OFF Maiden’s prayer Not Used ON OFF Buzzer Not Used OFF ON Chime SW12 ON 4 OFF Not used × Not used 5 6 MUSIC (CH1) selection. The music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit card. 7 ON 8 OFF Not used × Not used ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 173 Revision 4.0 PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator 6. External Interface PLO leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1. • PLO mounting slots The PLO card is mounted in Slots 21 and 23 of TSWM. Front View 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 EXCLK0 EXCLK1 PLO PLO TSWM TSW • LT cable connectors Connect the LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the TSWM backplane. Backplane EXCLK0 EXCLK1 TSWM Figure 3-12 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2) CHAPTER 3 Page 174 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator • EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the 4 inputs. (There are a maximum of 4 inputs.) DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) ➝ DIU3xx (low). 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Cable Lead Location 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 TSWM EXCLK1 EXCLK0 FM1 FM0 DIU3B DIU2B DIU1B DIU0B DCSB SYN1B SYN0B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 E E DIU3A DIU2A DIU1A DIU0A DCSA SYN1A SYN0A REAR VIEW MDF 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Installation Cable To Digital Interface and/or DCS Figure 3-12 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (2/2) PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1. • PLO mounting slots The PLO card is mounted in Slots 09 and 13 of ISWM. Front View 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 23 EXCLK0 EXCLK1 PLO PLO ISWM ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 175 Revision 4.0 PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator • LT cable connectors Connect LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK! on the ISWM backplane. Backplane EXCLK1 EXCLK0 ISWM Figure 3-13 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISW) (1/2) • EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the 4 inputs. (There are a maximum of 4 inputs.) DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) ➝ DIU3xx (low). Rear View ISWM EXCLK1 (Slot No.13) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 EXCLK0 (Slot No.09) 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A FM1 FM0 DIU3B DIU2B DIU1B DIU0B DCSB SYN1B SYN0B E E DIU3A DIU2A DIU1A DIU0A DCSA SYN1A SYN0A MDF Installation Cable To Digital Interface and/or DCS 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Figure 3-13 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISW) (2/2) CHAPTER 3 Page 176 Revision 4.0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ND-70182 (E) PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator • Cable Connection Diagram Provide the following wiring at the MDF. Figure 3-14 shows an example of a system that has the PLO cards in dual configuration. maximum 400 meters (1320 feet) (24 AWG) ISW MDF PCM Cable(IP) PLO#1 LT Connector Cable External High-Stability Oscillator #1 DCSA DCSB CLK EXCLK1 EXCLK1 PLO#0 LT Connector Cable DCSB DCSA EXCLK0 PCM Cable(IP) EXCLK0 BASEU External High-Stability Oscillator #0 CLK Figure 3-14 Cable Connection Diagram (ISW) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an External High-Stability Oscillator ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 177 Revision 4.0 PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator Figure 3-15 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface in LN. This example assumes that the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route. maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24AWG) LN LT Connector MDF Digital Interface Installation Cable PCM Cable (2P) RA TA ISW PLO#0 maximum 100 meters (330 feet) (24AWG) to other node PCM Carrier Equipment DSU RB TB POUTA POUTB Installation Cable CLK DIU0A0 EXCLK0 DIU0B0 Note 1 DIU1A0 DIU1B0 PLO#1 DIU2A0 EXCLK1 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DIU3B0 Installation Cable DIU0A1 DIU0B1 Note 2 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU2A1 DIU2B1 DIU3A1 DIU3B1 Note 1: PLO has a maximum 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority. Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system. Figure 3-15 Cable Connection Diagram (ISW) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface CHAPTER 3 Page 178 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator ISWM CLK00 (Slot No.08) CLK10 (Slot No.12) DCS Connection ISW-LN PLO CA-A EXCLK0 (Slot No.21) EXCLK1 (Slot No.23) TSWM0 PLO CLOCK1 (Slot No.23) PLO CLOCK0 (Slot No.21) TSWM1 PLO CLOCK0 (Slot No.21) PLO CLOCK1 (Slot No.23) PLO-CLK CA-A DIU Connection Note MDF Installation Cable PIN No. 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 Note: LEAD NAME FM1 FM0 DIU 3B DIU 2B DIU 1B DIU 0B PIN No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 To Digital Interface LEAD NAME E E DIU 3A DIU 2A DIU 1A DIU 0A For the DUI connection route diagram, see Figure 3-17. Figure 3-16 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISW-LN0) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 179 Revision 4.0 PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator Figure 3-17 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface. This figure assumes that the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route. maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24 AWG) IMG1 MDF LT Connector Digital Interface Installation Cable maximum 100 meters (330 feet) (24AWG) PLO#0 EXCLK0 RA RB TA TB POUT A POUT B PCM Cable (2P) PCM Carrier Equipment DSU to other node CLK Installation Cable DIU0A0 DIU0B0 DIU1A0 DIU1B0 DIU2A0 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DIU3B0 PLO#1 EXCLK1 Installation Cable DIU0A1 DIU0B1 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU2A1 DIU2B1 DIU3A1 DIU3B1 Note 1 Note 2 Note 1: PLO has a maximum of 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority. Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system. Figure 3-17 Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface CHAPTER 3 Page 180 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-CK16-A Phase Lock Oscillator ISW-LN PLO CA-A/ 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A and Installation Cable(25 P) ISW-LN PLO CA-A cable/ 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Pin Assignment PIN LEAD No. NAME 26 FM1 27 FM0 28 29 30 31 32 33 MDF PIN LEAD No. NAME 1 E 2 E 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MUSIC SOURCE Note Multiple connections between systems 0 and 1 are required on the MDF. Note: FM1 is not used. Figure 3-18 Connection of External Music-On-Hold 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE ON MB SW01 SW02 1234 56 78 ON 1234 56 78 ON SW03 12 ON SW10 ON SW11 SW12 1234 1234 56 78 ON ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 181 Revision 4.0 PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator 1. General Function This circuit card, used together with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization with the network. Since this circuit card provides a high precision base clock oscillator, the 4 IMG system can be a clock source office for the digital network. As seen in Figure 3-19, the PLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching network selection. DTI 0 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 1 CLOCK SOURCE DTI 2 CLOCK SOURCE DCS 1 DTI 3 CLOCK SOURCE DCS 0 MDF MDF 34PH EXCLK CA-A 34PH EXCLK CA-A BWB BWB SEL SEL OSC PLL OSC PLO #0 PLO #1 BWB TDSW00 PLL BWB TDSW01 TDSW02 TDSW03 TDSW10 TDSW11 TDSW12 Figure 3-19 Location of PH-CK17 (PLO) Card in the System CHAPTER 3 Page 182 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) TDSW13 PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator The source clock of the clock subordinate office is either the digital clock supply (DCS) or the digital interface clock (DIU0 - DIU3). When clock source failure has occurred, the PLO chooses another clock source automatically in the order of: 1. DCS 2. DIU0 3. DIU1 4. DIU2 5. DIU3 6. PLO changeover or the PLO internal oscillator drifting The PLO can output the clock signals (CLK) and the frame head signals (FH) as follows: • 32.768 MHz CLK • 8 KHz FH • 5 msec × “n” FH ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 183 Revision 4.0 PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator The MUSIC ROM also located on this circuit card contains the hold tone, and is supplied to the TSW circuit card. When an external music on hold is applied to the 4 IMG system, this circuit card provides the interface for the external hold tone source. FM SEL MUSIC ROM PLO#1 FM SEL MUSIC ROM TONE ROM PLO#0 SEL SEL TONE ROM Music/Tone Speech Path Memory for Music/Tone TDSW1 SEL SEL Music/Tone Speech Path Memory for Music/Tone TDSW00 Figure 3-20 Music Source CHAPTER 3 Page 184 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator 2. Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card is mounted in the TSWM of the slot shown below. Mounting Module TSWM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PLO 1 PLO 0 TSWM 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-21. ACT MB SW06 SW05 SW04 1 2 3 4 1 2 MJ MN SYNC ICK PALM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW01 SW02 SW03 Figure 3-21 Face Layout of PH-CK17 (PLO) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 185 Revision 4.0 PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME ACT COLOR Green Off STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state. Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state. Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred: MJ Red • All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock subordinate office. • 32.768 MHz output clock failure. • 8 KHz output FH failure. • 5 msec × “n” output FH failure. • Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card). • Internal OSC (±0.3 ppm deviation) has failed when the system operates as the clock source office. Lights when the following MN fault has occurred: MN Red Green • One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes failed. • Drifting failure. • Internal OSC (±0.3 ppm deviation) failure. Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network. Remains off when either of the following has occurred. SYNC OFF ICK Green PALM Red CHAPTER 3 Page 186 Revision 4.0 • DCS clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DCS. • DTI clock failure when receiving the clock signals from the DTI. • Drifting failure. Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally. Remains lit when power is abnormal. ND-70182 (E) PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator 5. Switch Settings Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING UP Circuit card Make-busy. MB SW03 SWITCH NAME DOWN × Circuit card Make-busy cancel. 1-F 1 Fixed to “1.” SWITCH NO. 1 2 3 SETTING STANDARD SETTING ON Clock subordinate office. OFF Clock source office. ON Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used. OFF Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used. ON Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used. OFF Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used. ON 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). OFF 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). ON When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator. OFF When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock. ON This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK11) card. OFF This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK11) card. ON A-law CODEC is used for the hold music. 4 SW01 5 6 7 8 MEANING OFF × µ-law CODEC is used for the hold music. OFF × Not used ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 187 Revision 4.0 PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 2 3 4 SW02 5 6 7 8 SW05 SWITCH NAME 1 DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero. OFF DIU 0 is not used. ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one. OFF DIU 1 is not used. ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two. OFF DIU 2 is not used. ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three. OFF DIU 3 is not used. × ON 1.5 M clock for DIU 0 OFF 2 M clock for DIU 0 × ON 1.5 M clock for DIU 1 OFF 2 M clock for DIU 1 × ON 1.5 M clock for DIU 2 OFF 2 M clock for DIU 2 × ON 1.5 M clock for DIU 3 OFF 2 M clock for DIU 3 ON External hold tone source is used via FM lead. × OFF OFF SWITCH NO. SETTING 2 MEANING ON 2 1 STANDARD SETTING SETTING MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone. Not used STANDARD SETTING SW8F-1 MEANING SW8F-2 Impedance of the External Music Source 0 (FM 0) OFF OFF 600 Ω ON OFF 8.2 Ω OFF ON 47K Ω SW06 3 4 CHAPTER 3 Page 188 Revision 4.0 SW8F-3 SW8F-4 Impedance of the External Music Source 1 (FM 1) OFF OFF 600 Ω ON OFF 8.2 Ω OFF ON 47K Ω ND-70182 (E) PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. STANDARD SETTING SETTING SWA0-1 1 2 MEANING SWA0-2 SWA0-3 MUSIC OFF OFF OFF Für Elise ON OFF OFF Maiden’s prayer Not Used OFF ON Buzzer Not Used ON OFF Chime 3 SW04 4 ON OFF Not used × Not used 5 6 MUSIC CH1 selection. The kind of music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit card. 7 8 ON OFF Not used × Not used ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 189 Revision 4.0 PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator 6. External Interface When this circuit card is located in the TSWM, connect 34PH EXCLK CA-A to the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors on the backplane of the TSWM. TSWM Mounting Module 34PH EXCLK CA-A LEAD ACCOMMODATION 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 REAR VIEW TSWM EXCLK1 (Slot No.23) EXCLK0 (Slot No.21) FM 1 FM 0 SYN 1B SYN 0B DIU 3B DIU 2B DIU 1B DIU 0B DCS B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 E E SYN 1A SYN 0A DIU 3A DIU 2A DIU 1A DIU 0A DCS A 34PH EXCLK CA-A MDF Installation Cable To Digital Interface and/or DCS 34PH EXCLK CA-A Slot No. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 FRONT VIEW Figure 3-22 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (TSWM) CHAPTER 3 Page 190 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PLO #1 PLO #0 TSWM PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator PBX MDF CCT /DTI /PRT POUT A POUT B CCT /DTI /PRT POUT A POUT B CCT /DTI /PRT POUT A POUT B CCT /DTI /PRT POUT A POUT B PLO #0 DCSA0 DCSB0 DIU0A0 DIU0B0 DIU1A0 DIU1B0 DIU2A0 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DIU3B0 DCS DCSA1 PLO #1 DCSB1 DIU0A1 DIU0B1 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU2A1 DIU2B1 DIU3A1 DIU3B1 Note : The following circuit cards have Clock Output Leads for a PLO card: CCT (PA-24CCTA, PA-30CCTB), DTI (PA-24DTR, PA-30DTS), and PRT (PA-24PRT, PA-30PRTC). Figure 3-23 Connecting Route Diagram ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 191 Revision 4.0 PH-CK17 Phase Lock Oscillator 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ON MB 1234 5678 ON 12 34 5678 ON SW01 SW02 SW03 SW05 SW06 12 1234 12 34 5678 ON ON ON SW04 CHAPTER 3 Page 192 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator 1. General Function This circuit card used together with a direct digital interface circuit card, sets up network synchronization between networks. Since this circuit card provides a high precision base clock oscillator, the system containing this circuit card can be a clock source office of the digital network. As seen in the figure below, the PLO can be redundant regardless of the system switching network selection. This circuit card is used for the IMX-U system. DTI0 1 2 3 DCS0 (MDF) PLO 0 ISW OSC DCS1 PLO 1 64K+8K OSC (BWB) SEL SEL CLK, FH, WFH ACT, ALM PLL PLL (BWB) Drv Drv 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT (BWB) 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT (BWB) HSW00 TSW00 HSW01 ~ TSW03 HSW11 HSW10 64K+FH, WFH TSW ACT (Cable) 64K+FH, WFH TSW ACT (Cable) TSW10 ~ TSW13 from LN DTI from LN DTI LN0 (IMG0/IMG1) PLO 0 (TSWM0) PLO 0 (TSWM0) PLO 1 (TSWM0) LN3 (IMG0/IMG1) PLO 1 (TSWM0) 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT TSW 00~03 TSW 10~13 MUX (System0) MUX (System1) ~ TSW 10~13 MUX (System0) MUX (System1) LC/TRK LC/TRK LN0 (IMG2/IMG3) TSW 00~03 CLK0 (TSWM1) CLK1 (TSWM1) CLK0 (TSWM1) CLK1 (TSWM1) 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT LN3 (IMG2/IMG3) 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT TSW 00~03 TSW 10~13 MUX (System0) MUX (System1) LC/TRK ~ TSW 00~03 TSW 10~13 MUX (System0) MUX (System1) LC/TRK Figure 3-24 Location of PH-CK17-A (PLO) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 193 Revision 4.0 PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator 2. Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card can be mounted in the shaded slots shown below. Mounting Module ISWM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 PLO (#1) PLO (#0) Mounting Module TSWM0 (IMG1) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 ND-70182 (E) PLO (#1) PLO (#0) CHAPTER 3 Page 194 Revision 4.0 PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-25 OPE MB MJ MN SYNC ICK 1 2 3 4 SW11 CKPKG ALM0 ALM1 PALM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW12 1 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3. SW01 SW02 SW03 Figure 3-25 Face Layout of PH-CK17-A (PLO) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 195 Revision 4.0 PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below: LAMP NAME COLOR OPE Green STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state. Lights when the following MJ fault has occurred: MJ Red • All of the clock supply routes have failed when the system operates as the clock subordinate office • 32.768 MHz output clock failure (including CLK card) • 8 KHz output clock failure (including CLK card) • Input Frame Pulse (FP) failure (FP is supplied by the SYNC card) • Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) have failed when the system operates as the clock source office Lights when the following MN fault has occurred: MN Note: Red • One or more (but not all) DTI/DCS clock supply routes have failed • Drifting failure • Internal OSC (±5 ppm deviation) failure SYNC Green Remains lit while the system is synchronized with the network. ICK Green Lights when the internal oscillator is operating normally. CKPKG Note Green Lights when the CLK card in TSWM1 is in normal operation. ALM0 Note Red Lights when clock failure has occurred in the CLK card. ALM1 Note Red Lights when FH failure has occurred in the CLK card. PALM Red Remains lit when the On-Board Power Supply is abnormal. This lamp is effective when this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IMX-U system. CHAPTER 3 Page 196 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator 5. Switch Settings Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING UP Circuit card Make-busy. MB SW03 SWITCH NAME DOWN × Circuit card Make-busy cancel. 1-F 1 Fixed to “1.” SWITCH NO. 1 2 3 SETTING ON STANDARD SETTING × Note 1 OFF ON × Note 1 × Note 1 Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is not used. ON 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). × Note 1 5 8 When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO continues outputting the current phase clock. × OFF ON 8 KHz of Frame Head signals are not extracted from the DCS signals (which is composed of 64 KHz + 8 KHz). When clock source failure has occurred in all supply routes, the PLO outputs the original clock of the internal oscillator. ON 7 Digital Clock Supply route one (DCS 1) is used. OFF OFF 6 Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is used. Digital Clock Supply route zero (DCS 0) is not used. 4 SW01 Note 1 Clock subordinate office. Clock source office. OFF ON MEANING × Note 1 This circuit card is associated with SYNC (PA-CK11) card. OFF This circuit card is not associated with SYNC (PA-CK11) card. ON A-law CODEC is used for Music-On-Hold. OFF × µ-law CODEC is used for Music-On-Hold. OFF × Fixed OFF (Not used). Note 1: When this card is used in the 4-IMG or ISWM of the IMX-U system, specify the clock source (DCS or DTI) according to the clock network configuration for the office. Note 2: This standard setting is applicable when this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IMX-U system. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 197 Revision 4.0 PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 2 3 4 SW02 Note 5 6 7 8 1 SW10 2 Note: SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING ON DIU 0 is used as the DTI clock supply route zero. OFF DIU 0 is not used. ON DIU 1 is used as the DTI clock supply route one. OFF DIU 1 is not used. ON DIU 2 is used as the DTI clock supply route two. OFF DIU 2 is not used. ON DIU 3 is used as the DTI clock supply route three. OFF DIU 3 is not used. ON × OFF ON 2 M clock for DIU 0. × OFF ON 1.5 M clock for DIU 1. 2 M clock for DIU 1. × OFF ON 1.5 M clock for DIU 0. 1.5 M clock for DIU 2. 2 M clock for DIU 2. × 1.5 M clock for DIU 3. OFF 2 M clock for DIU 3. ON External hold tone source is used via FM lead. OFF × ON OFF MUSIC ROM is used as the hold tone. CLK card is not used. × CLK card is used. When this card is mounted in TSWM0 of the IMX-U system, DCS clock from the ISW is used. The DTI clock can also be used as an alternate clock supply route in case of DCS clock failure. CHAPTER 3 Page 198 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. STANDARD SETTING SETTING SW11-1 1 2 MEANING Impedance of the External Music Source 0 (FM 0) SW11-2 OFF OFF 600 Ω ON OFF 8.2 Ω OFF ON 47K Ω SW11 SW11-3 3 4 1 OFF OFF 600 Ω ON OFF 8.2 Ω OFF ON 47K Ω SW12-1 2 3 Impedance of the External Music Source 1 (FM 1) SW11-4 SW12-2 SW12-3 MUSIC OFF OFF OFF Für Elise ON OFF OFF Maiden’s prayer Not Used ON OFF Buzzer Not Used OFF ON Chime SW12 ON 4 OFF Not used × Not used 5 6 MUSIC (CH1) selection. The music varies depending on the melody IC located on this circuit card. 7 ON 8 OFF Not used × Not used ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 199 Revision 4.0 PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator 6. External Interface PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 • PLO mounting slots The PLO card is mounted in slots 21 and 23 of TSWM. Front View 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 EXCLK0 EXCLK1 PLO PLO TSWM TSW • LT cable connectors Connect the LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1 on the TSWM backplane. Backplane EXCLK0 EXCLK1 TSWM Figure 3-26 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG System) (1/2) CHAPTER 3 Page 200 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator • EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the 4 inputs. (There are a maximum of 4 inputs.) DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) ➝ DIU3xx (low). 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Cable Lead Location 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 TSWM EXCLK1 EXCLK0 FM1 FM0 DIU3B DIU2B DIU1B DIU0B DCSB SYN1B SYN0B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 E E DIU3A DIU2A DIU1A DIU0A DCSA SYN1A SYN0A REAR VIEW MDF 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Installation Cable To Digital Interface and/or DCS Figure 3-26 PLO Pin Assignments for Receiving Clock (4 IMG) (2/2) PLO input leads appear on the LT connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK1. • PLO mounting slots The PLO card is mounted in Slots 09 and 13 of ISWM. Front View 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 23 EXCLK0 EXCLK1 PLO PLO ISWM ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 201 Revision 4.0 PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator • LT cable connectors Connect LT cables to the connectors labeled EXCLK0 and EXCLK! on the ISWM backplane. Backplane EXCLK1 EXCLK0 ISWM Figure 3-27 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISW) (1/2) • EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connector Pin Assignment Pins are assigned as follows on the EXCLK0/EXCLK1 connectors. When the clock is distributed from a digital interface, use one pair of DIUxxx in one of the 4 inputs. (There are a maximum of 4 inputs.) DIU leads have the following precedence: DIU0xx (high) ➝ DIU3xx (low). Rear View ISWM EXCLK1 (Slot No.13) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 EXCLK0 (Slot No.09) 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A FM1 FM0 DIU3B DIU2B DIU1B DIU0B DCSB SYN1B SYN0B E E DIU3A DIU2A DIU1A DIU0A DCSA SYN1A SYN0A MDF Installation Cable To Digital Interface and/or DCS 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Figure 3-27 PLO Pin Assignment for Receiving Clock (ISW) (2/2) CHAPTER 3 Page 202 Revision 4.0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 ND-70182 (E) PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator • Cable Connection Diagram Provide the following wiring at the MDF. The following connection diagram shows an example of a system that has the PLO cards in dual configuration. Figure 3-28 is a cable connection diagram (ISW) for accepting synchronization clocks from an external high-stability oscillator. maximum 400 meters (1320 feet) (24 AWG) ISW MDF PCM Cable(IP) PLO#1 LT Connector Cable External High-Stability Oscillator #1 DCSA DCSB CLK EXCLK1 EXCLK1 PLO#0 LT Connector Cable DCSB DCSA EXCLK0 PCM Cable(IP) EXCLK0 BASEU External High-Stability Oscillator #0 CLK Figure 3-28 Cable Connection (ISW) for Accepting Synchronization Clocks from an External Oscillator ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 203 Revision 4.0 PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator This figure shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface in LN. This example assumes that the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route. maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24AWG) LN LT Connector MDF Digital Interface ISW PLO#0 Installation Cable PCM Cable (2P) RA maximum 100 meters (330 feet) (24AWG) to other node PCM Carrier Equipment DSU RB TA TB POUTA POUTB Installation Cable CLK DIU0A0 EXCLK0 DIU0B0 Note 1 DIU1A0 DIU1B0 PLO#1 DIU2A0 EXCLK1 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DIU3B0 Installation Cable DIU0A1 DIU0B1 Note 2 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU2A1 DIU2B1 DIU3A1 DIU3B1 Note 1: PLO has a maximum 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority. Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system. Figure 3-29 Cable Connection Diagram (ISW) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface CHAPTER 3 Page 204 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator ISWM CLK00 (Slot No.08) CLK10 (Slot No.12) DCS Connection ISW-LN PLO CA-A EXCLK0 (Slot No.21) EXCLK1 (Slot No.23) TSWM0 PLO CLOCK1 (Slot No.23) PLO CLOCK0 (Slot No.21) TSWM1 PLO CLOCK0 (Slot No.21) PLO CLOCK1 (Slot No.23) PLO-CLK CA-A DIU Connection Note MDF Installation Cable PIN No. 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 LEAD NAME FM1 FM0 DIU 3B DIU 2B DIU 1B DIU 0B PIN No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 To Digital Interface LEAD NAME E E DIU 3A DIU 2A DIU 1A DIU 0A Note: For DIU connection route diagram, see the figure on the next page. Figure 3-30 LT Connector Lead Location of PLO (ISW-LN0) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 205 Revision 4.0 PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator Figure 3-31 shows an example of distributing clock from a digital interface. This figure assumes that the Digital Trunk POUT leads are used as the first clock distribution route. maximum 200 meters (660 feet) (24 AWG) IMG1 MDF LT Connector Digital Interface Installation Cable maximum 100 meters (330 feet) (24AWG) PLO#0 EXCLK0 RA RB TA TB POUT A POUT B PCM Cable (2P) PCM Carrier Equipment DSU to other node CLK Installation Cable DIU0A0 DIU0B0 DIU1A0 DIU1B0 DIU2A0 DIU2B0 DIU3A0 DIU3B0 PLO#1 EXCLK1 Installation Cable DIU0A1 DIU0B1 DIU1A1 DIU1B1 DIU2A1 DIU2B1 DIU3A1 DIU3B1 Note 1 Note 2 Note 1: PLO has a maximum of 4 inputs. DIU0xx leads are used for the 1st clock distribution routes. DIU3xx leads are used for the 4th. The first input has the highest priority. Note 2: The connection is required for a dual PLO system. Figure 3-31 Cable Connection Diagram (4-IMG System/LN) for Receiving Clock from Digital Interface CHAPTER 3 Page 206 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-CK17-A Phase Lock Oscillator ISW-LN PLO CA-A / 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A and Installation Cable(25P) MDF ISW-LN PLO CA-A cable/ 34PH ISWM EXCLK CA-A Pin Assignment PIN LEAD No. NAME 26 FM1 27 FM0 28 29 30 31 32 33 PIN LEAD No. NAME 1 E 2 E 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 MUSIC SOURCE Note Multiple connections between the systems 0 and 1 are required on the MDF. Note: FM1 is not used at this time. Figure 3-32 Connection of External Music-On-Hold 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE ON MB SW01 12 34 5678 ON SW02 12 34 5678 ON SW03 12 ON SW10 ON SW11 SW12 1234 1234 5678 ON ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 207 Revision 4.0 PH-CK18 Clock PH-CK18 Clock 1. General Function This circuit card is used for the Local Node of the IMX-U system. The main function of this circuit card is to supply basic clock signals to the system. This card receives clock signals from the Phase Lock Oscillator (PLO) located in TSWM0 of IMG1, distributing the following signals to the Time Division Switch (TSW) located in TSWM1 of IMG2. • 32.768 MHz CLK • 8 KHz FH • 5 msec × “n” FH (for Wireless System) CHAPTER 3 Page 208 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PH-CK18 Clock DTI0 1 2 3 DCS0 (MDF) PLO 0 ISW OSC DCS1 PLO 1 64K+8K OSC (BWB) SEL SEL CLK, FH, WFH ACT, ALM PLL PLL (BWB) Drv Drv 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT (BWB) 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT (BWB) HSW00 TSW00 HSW01 ~ TSW03 HSW11 HSW10 64K+FH, WFH TSW ACT (Cable) 64K+FH, WFH TSW ACT (Cable) TSW10 ~ TSW13 from LN DTI from LN DTI LN0 (IMG0/IMG1) PLO 0 (TSWM0) PLO 0 (TSWM0) PLO 1 (TSWM0) LN3 (IMG0/IMG1) PLO 1 (TSWM0) 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT TSW 00~03 TSW 10~13 MUX (System0) MUX (System1) ~ TSW 00~03 TSW 10~13 MUX (System0) MUX (System1) LC/TRK LC/TRK LN0 (IMG2/IMG3) CLK0 (TSWM1) CLK1 (TSWM1) CLK0 (TSWM1) CLK1 (TSWM1) 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT LN3 (IMG2/IMG3) 32M, FH+WFH PLO ACT TSW 00~03 TSW 10~13 MUX (System0) MUX (System1) ~ LC/TRK TSW 00~03 TSW 10~13 MUX (System0) MUX (System1) LC/TRK Figure 3-33 Location of PH-CK18 (CLK) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 209 Revision 4.0 PH-CK18 Clock 2. Mounting Location/Condition Mounting locations for this circuit card are shown below. Mounting Module TSWM1 (IMG2) 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of each lamp and switch on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-34. OPE MB ALM0 ALM1 PALM Figure 3-34 Face Layout of PH-CK18 (CLK) CHAPTER 3 Page 210 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) CLK (#1) CLK (#0) 3. PH-CK18 Clock 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown below: LAMP COLOR OPE Green Lights when this circuit card is in ACT state. ALM 0 Red Lights when clock signal failure has occurred. ALM 1 Red Lights when Frame Head signal failure has occurred. PALM Red Lights when the On Board Power Supply failure has occurred. 5. MEANING Switch Settings Switch settings for this circuit card are shown below. SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SETTING ON MB OFF MEANING Circuit card Make-busy. × Circuit card Make-busy cancel. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 211 Revision 4.0 PH-CK18 Clock 6. External Interface PIM ISWM CLK00 (Slot No.08) CLK10 (Slot No.12) DCS Connection ISW-LN PLO CA-A EXCLK0 (Slot No.21) EXCLK1 (Slot No.23) TSWM0 PLO CLOCK1 (Slot No.23) PLO CLOCK0 (Slot No.21) PLO CLOCK0 (Slot No.21) PLO CLOCK1 (Slot No.23) PLO-CLK CA-A DIU Connection Note Installation Cable PIN No. 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 LEAD NAME DIU 3B DIU 2B DIU 1B DIU 0B PIN No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 MDF To Digital Interface and/or DCS LEAD NAME DIU 3A DIU 2A DIU 1A DIU 0A Note: For DIU connection route diagram, see the figure on the next page. Figure 3-35 LT Connector Lead Location (ISW-LN0) 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ON MB CHAPTER 3 Page 212 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) TSWM1 PA-CS08 Hotel Attendant Interface PA-CS08 Hotel Attendant Interface 1. General Function This circuit card is the Hotel Attendant Console (Hotel ATTCON) interface card that supports the interface function for the Hotel ATTCON (maximum two sets of Hotel ATTCON per card), PM function (controlling of Hotel ATTCON and exchanging of control commands with the CPU), PB/DP sending function (sending of PB signals or DP signals under control of the PM), receiving data (Hotel ATTCON Call Termination Information) link interface function, etc. : Control Line : Speech Path IO Local Bus : Input Output Local Bus PM Bus : Port Microprocessor Bus TDSW 2M PCM Highway MUX PM Bus CPU GT HMATI ATTENDANT CONSOLE (×2) Figure 3-36 Location of PA-CS08-B (HMATI) Card in the System 2. Mounting Location/Condition The PA-CS08-B (HMATI) card can be mounted in the shaded slots as shown below. Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 HMATI HMATI ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 213 Revision 4.0 PA-CS08 Hotel Attendant Interface 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-37. SW03 SW08 SW02 SW07 OPE N-OPE SW04 MB SW11 FU1 (Note) FU0 (Note) BLS1 BLS0 BLA1 BLA0 SW09 3 2 1 0 SW12 Note: When extracting/inserting this card, care should be taken as to the FU0, FU1.➀ MB key → ON ➁ Remove the FU0 and FU1. ➂ Extract this card. ➀ Mount this card without the FU0 and FU1. ➁ Plug in the FU0 and FU1. ➂ MB key → OFF Figure 3-37 Face Layout of HMATI Card 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP COLOR OPE Green N-OPE Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state. Red Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. BLS0 BLS1 STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Blinks when the corresponding circuit is busy. Blink Note: CHAPTER 3 Page 214 Revision 4.0 The lamp also blinks when dial signals are being sent out. ND-70182 (E) PA-CS08 Hotel Attendant Interface 5. LAMP COLOR BLA0 BLA1 Red STATE Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Blink Blinks when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state. Switch Settings Standard settings for various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD SETTING UP MB MEANING Circuit card Make-busy. Circuit card Make-busy cancel. DOWN 1 SETTING OF TAS SIGNALLING SYSTEM 2 SWITCH 3 SW02 (TAS0) SW03 (TAS1) 4 SW04 1 ON × Fixed 2 OFF × Fixed 3 ON × Fixed 4 OFF × Fixed TAS (A WIRE) TAS (B WIRE) 1 -48V G 2 CR G 3 G G 4 LOOP LOOP 1 SETTING OF TAS CURRENT LIMIT RESISTANCE 2 SW07 (TAS0) SW08 (TAS1) 3 SW7-1/ SW8-1 SW7-2/ SW8-2 SW7-3/ SW8-3 SW7-4/ SW8-4 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF RESISTANCE 0Ω 200 Ω 390 Ω 590 Ω 820 Ω 1020 Ω 1210 Ω 1410 Ω 4 ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 215 Revision 4.0 PA-CS08 Hotel Attendant Interface SWITCH SWITCH NO. 1 2 SW11 3 4 1 2 SW12 3 4 0 SW9 Note: 1 SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING ON × Fixed × Fixed × Fixed OFF × Fixed ON × OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON × OFF ON × Fixed (all ON). OFF ON × OFF ON OFF No. 0 System is in Make-busy request. × ON Normal setting. No. 1 System is in Make-busy request. OFF × Normal setting 2 OFF × Not used 3 OFF × Not used When the PB signal is sent from the Hotel ATT, set the SW 12-1~4 ON, and assign AHSY command, INDEX 114, b7 = I. CHAPTER 3 Page 216 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-CS08 Hotel Attendant Interface 6. External Interface The location for the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-38. Mounting Module PIM LT5, 11 Connecter (LT Connector on the ATT TERM) 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 TAS 0B0 43 TAS 1B0 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 TAS 0A0 18 TAS 1A0 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT11 LT5 LT0 Slot No. LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 Group No. 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 HMATI HMATI PIM 19 18 17 16 Figure 3-38 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 217 Revision 4.0 PA-CS08 Hotel Attendant Interface 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH SWITCH SHAPE ON MB REMARKS UP: Circuit card Make-busy. DOWN: Circuit card Make-busy cancel. 1 2 3 4 SW02 1 2 3 4 SW03 ON SW04 ON SW07 ON SW08 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 OFF SW09 No. 3 No. 2 No. 1 No. 0 SW9-2, SW9-3: Not used. ON (Piano Switch) ON SW11 ON SW12 CHAPTER 3 Page 218 Revision 4.0 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 ND-70182 (E) PA-CS33 Attendant Interface PA-CS33 Attendant Interface 1. General Function This circuit card is a Desk Console interface which supports the interface function for accommodating two sets of Desk Consoles, PB/DP sender function and Trunk Answer from any Station (TAS) function. MUX PCM HW PM BUS MUX PCM HW PM BUS MUX PCM HW PM BUS PCM HW TSW/INT/PLO CPR GT PM BUS MUX LC/TRK ATI DESK CONSOLE Figure 3-39 Location of PA-CS33 (ATI) Card in the System ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 219 Revision 4.0 PA-CS33 Attendant Interface 2. Mounting Location/Condition The PA-CS33 (ATI) can be mounted in either Slot 12 or 23 of the PIM. Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 ATI ATI Universal Slots Universal Slots 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches and connectors is shown in Figure 3-40. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW17 SW14 SW11 SW10 SW13 SW12 SW00 PALM BLA1 BLA0 BLS1 BLS0 SW15 SW01 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW16 Figure 3-40 Face Layout of PA-CS33 (ATI) CHAPTER 3 Page 220 Revision 4.0 OPE ND-70182 (E) PA-CS33 Attendant Interface 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR Green STATE Remains lit while circuit card is operating normally. OPE OFF Off when circuit card is not operating. Red Lights when the power feeding circuit failure has occurred. OFF Off when the power feeding circuit operates normally. Red Lights when the corresponding circuit busy (At the same time, turns off PA lamp on the Desk Console). PALM BLA0 BLA1 Flash (60 IPM) OFF Off when the corresponding circuit is in idle (At the same time, turns onPA lamp on the Desk console). Red Lights when the corresponding sender circuit is in use. Flash (60 IPM) BLS0 BLS1 OFF 5. Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state. Flashes when the corresponding sender circuit is in Make-busy state or when select signals are being transmitted. Off when the corresponding sender circuit is in idle. Switch Setting Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SETTING UP SW00 DOWN MEANING Circuit card is Make-busy. × Circuit card is cancel for Make-busy. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 221 Revision 4.0 PA-CS33 Attendant Interface SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO SETTING STANDARD SETTING ON × MEANING Make-busy cancel for #0 Desk Console. 0 OFF Make-busy request for #0 Desk Console. × ON SW01 Make-busy cancel for #1 Desk Console. 1 OFF Make-busy request for #1 Desk Console. 2 OFF × Not used 3 OFF × Not used SW10 and SW13 designate the current limit resistance for TAS#0 and TAS#1 respectively. SW10-3/ SW13-3 1 SW10 (TAS#0) 2 SW13 (TAS#1) 3 SW10-2/ SW13-2 SW10-1/ SW13-1 STANDARD SETTING RESISTANCE ON ON ON 0Ω ON ON OFF 220 Ω ON OFF ON 398 Ω ON OFF OFF 618 Ω OFF ON ON 800 Ω OFF ON OFF 1020 Ω OFF OFF ON 1198 Ω OFF OFF OFF × 1418 Ω This switch designates the TAS signaling system in conjunction with SW 11/12 and SW14/ 15. 4 SW11/12 and SW14/15 designate the TAS#0 and TAS#1 signaling system (in conjunction with SW10-4 (TAS#0)/SW13-4 (TAS#1). SW11/ SW12 (TAS#0) SW14/ SW15 (TAS#1) CHAPTER 3 Page 222 Revision 4.0 SIGNAL WHEN SEIZED SW12/ SW15 SW11/ SW14 SW10-4/ SW13-4 ON ON ON CR G OFF ON ON -48V G OFF OFF OFF LOOP LOOP OFF OFF ON G G ND-70182 (E) STANDARD SETTING × TAS 0A/ TAS 1A TAS 0B/ TAS 1B PA-CS33 Attendant Interface SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO STANDARD SETTING SETTING MEANING For Business system, set SW16-1 and SW16-7 to OFF. When the system has Hotel application, set SW16-1 and SW16-7 according to system data as shown below. Desk Console Key pattern to be used SYS 1 INDEX 160 SW16-1 SW16-7 Bit 1 1 2 SW16 3 Hotel type ON Business type OFF 2 OFF 0 1 ON — 1 OFF — 0 Desk Console Expanded LCD Display not available. SW16-3/4/5 designates the nation code as showing below. SW16-4 SW16-3 COUNTRY ON ON OFF NORTH AMERICA ON OFF ON AUSTRALIA Other combinations ON Not used A-law PCM coding. OFF 1 1 OFF 5 8 1 Desk Console Expanded LCD Display available. 4 7 ON ON SW16-5 6 Bit 0 × µ-law PCM coding. × Not used (Fixed to OFF). Refer to SW16-1. OFF ON Denial of PCM receiving while transmitting PB signals. OFF × PCM receives irrespective of PB signals transmission. ON × Fixed to ON. Desk Console Key Pattern. Set SW17-3 and SW17-4 according to SYS 1, Index 6. 3 SYS 1 INDEX 6 SW17-3 SW17-4 Bit 6 SW17 4 Note: 5~7 OFF 8 Note ON OFF Bit 5 Bit 4 OFF OFF 0 0 0 ON OFF 0 0 1 OFF ON 0 1 0 ON ON 1 0 0 × Fixed to OFF. Start up in Night mode after circuit card initialization. × Start up in Day mode after circuit card initialization. DESK CONSOLE starts up in Day or Night mode according to this setting after the circuit card initialization, regardless of the mode before the initialization. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 223 Revision 4.0 PA-CS33 Attendant Interface 6. External Interface Location of the LT connector leads for the DESK CONSOLE interface is as shown in Figure 3-41. Mounting Module LT5, 11 connector PIM The lead for each ADD ON CONSOLE is shown below. Note: #0 ADD ON MODULE A0 B0 BN4800 - 48v BN4801 - 48v #1 ADD ON MODULE A1 B1 BN4810 - 48v BN4811 - 48v 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 BN4800 BN4820 BN4810 BN4830 B0 B2 B1 B3 BN4801 The lead for each DESK CONSOLE is shown below. Note: BN4821 BN4811 BN4831 A0 #0 DESK #1 DESK CONSOLE CONSOLE A2 A3 A2 A1 B2 BN4820 - 48v A3 BN4821 - 48v B3 BN4830 - 48v BN4831 - 48v LT5 LT0 Slot No. LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT11 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 01 03 05 07 09 11 15 19 23 01 03 05 07 09 11 14 18 22 15 19 23 14 18 22 Group No. 00 02 04 06 08 10 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 16 20 Figure 3-41 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) CHAPTER 3 Page 224 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) 13 17 21 12 16 20 ATI ATI PIM 13 17 21 PA-CS33 Attendant Interface PBX Installation MDF IDF 6-PIN MODULAR ROSETTE Cable ATI A2 #0 DESK CONSOLE A2 B2 B2 BN 4820 (-48V) BN 4821 (-48V) BN4820 BN4821 6-PIN MODULAR CABLE GND GND #1 DESK CONSOLE A3 A3 B3 B3 B N 4 830 BN4830 B N 4 831 BN4831 GND GND GND (PZ-M377) Figure 3-42 Connecting Route Diagram Note: The power feeding wires (BN4820/BN4821/BN4830/BN4831/GND) are not required when the power is supplied to the DESK CONSOLE locally. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 225 Revision 4.0 PA-CS33 Attendant Interface Figure 3-43 shows how to connect Desk Console. Wire the cables to the Modular Block as shown below. Bottom View 6-core Modular Cable 6-core Modular Block IDF/MDF PAGE LINE (8-core) REC (6-core) (8-core) PA-CS33 Pin Assignment DESK CONSOLE PIN LEAD PIN LEAD No. NAME No. NAME 26 1 27 2 DESK CONSOLE Desk Console Modular Jack Transformer 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 6-core Modular Cable GND Surge Protection - 48 V A1 B1 DC/DC Convertor GND GND –48V/–24V - 48 V BN4800 BN4820 BN4810 BN4830 B2 B0 B1 B3 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 BN4801 BN4821 BN4811 BN4831 A2 Add-on for Console 0 A0 Console 0 A1 A3 Add-on for Console 1 Console 1 G Note: GND wires should be connected to PZ-M77. (BASE-U) Figure 3-43 Desk Console Connection Power supply and the maximum distance between the ATI and Desk Console. The maximum distance between the ATI circuit card and Desk Console is as shown below. Source 0.5 φ Cable 0.65 φ Cable PBX Local Power Supply 1,148 ft. (350 m) 3,937 ft. (1,200 m) 1,640 ft. (500 m) 4,921 ft. (1,500 m) CHAPTER 3 Page 226 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-CS33 Attendant Interface If the distance exceeds above, estimate it according to the calculations shown in Figure 3-44. m A B Installation Cable PBX ATI MDF C 6-pin Modular rosette IDF A2 A B2 B BN4820 (-48V) BN4820 BN4821 (-48V) BN4821 #0 DESK CONSOLE 6-pin Modular Cable GND GND #1 DESK CONSOLE A3 A B3 B BN4830 BN4830 BN4831 BN4831 GND GND GND (PZ-M377) Figure 3-44 Distance between PBX and Modular Rosette of Desk Console ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 227 Revision 4.0 PA-CS33 Attendant Interface Calculation of the distance between the ATI circuit card and Modular Rosette The distance M in the figure above is determined according to the Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND). Note that the maximum resistance is 26 Ω as shown in the following formula: m=a+b+c < = 26Ω m: Maximum Direct-Current resistance between the ATI circuit card and Modular Rosette a: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of A b: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of B c: Direct-Current resistance of power supply cables (-48V and GND) in the range of C Example of Calculation a, b, and c are calculated by the following formulae: Note: You are not required to use cable lengths in meters in the following formulae. You may use cable lengths in feet, yards, or whatever units you prefer. However, the units of resistance you use must match the units of length you use. For example, if you use distance in feet, you must also use DC resistance per foot. a= Cable resistance of DC -48V cables Cable resistance on GND cables u (Ω/m) × x (m) u (Ω/m) × x (m) + 2 1 No. of DC -48V cables No. of GND cables b= Cable resistance of DC -48V cables Cable resistance on GND cables v (Ω/m) × y (m) v (Ω/m) × y (m) + 2 2 No. of DC -48V cables No. of GND cables c= Cable resistance of DC -48V cables Cable resistance on GND cables w (Ω/m) × z (m) w (Ω/m) × z (m) + 2 2 No. of DC -48V cables No. of GND cables u : DC resistance per meter in the range of A (Ω/m) v : DC resistance per meter in the range of B (Ω/m) w : DC resistance per meter in the range of C (Ω/m) x : Cable length (m) in the range of A y : Cable length (m) in the range of B z : Cable length (m) in the range of C CHAPTER 3 Page 228 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-CS33 Attendant Interface The location of the LT connector leads for the TAS interface is as shown in Figure 3-45. Mounting Module PIM LT5, 11 connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 TAS1B TAS0B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 TAS1A TAS0A LT11 LT5 LT0 Slot No. LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 Group No. 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 ATI ATI PIM 19 18 17 16 Figure 3-45 LT Connector Lead Location (PIM) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 229 Revision 4.0 PA-CS33 Attendant Interface 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ON SW00 OFF SW01 ON SW10 (TAS #0) SW13 (TAS #1) 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 ON ON SW11 (TAS #0) OFF ON SW12 (TAS #0) OFF ON SW14 (TAS #1) OFF ON OFF ON SW15 (TAS #1) SW16 1234 56 78 ON SW17 1234 56 78 ON CHAPTER 3 Page 230 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-16LCBW Line Circuit PA-16LCBW Line Circuit 1. General Function The PA-16LCBW circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 16 analog voice terminals and the system with a range of 1200 (0hm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send “Stutter Dial Tone,” which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required. In addition, momentary open/reverse battery function is provided for 16 channels on this card. This is a -48V card. INT C. O. line PUBLIC NETWORK SW COT (PA-16LCBW) LC Analog Terminal max. 1200 [Ω] • Loop Resistance: Max. 1200 [Ω] (inclusive of terminal Resistance) • Open Function: x 15 circuits • Reverse / Open Function: x 1 circuit (selectable) • Stutter Dial Tone/Message Waiting Lamp (selectable) • Encoding Law: µ-law Local I/O Bus CPU GT Figure 3-46 Location of PA-16LCBW (LC) within the System ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 231 Revision 4.0 PA-16LCBW Line Circuit 2. Mounting Location/Condition The PA-16LCBW (LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following universal slots. Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards. Note: 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-47. OPE SW00 (MB) SW18 BL15 BL0 SW17 SW16 SW15 SW14 SW10 SW11 Figure 3-47 Face Layout of PA-16LCBW (LC) CHAPTER 3 Page 232 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-16LCBW Line Circuit 4. Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME LAMP COLOR LAMP STATUS OPE Green Steady Lighting The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally. Steady Lighting Line loop exists. ~ BL0 BL15 Green Flashing MEANING OF INDICATION 1) Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal. 2) Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received, Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line. 3) Line is in make-busy state. Busy Lamp keeps flashing at 60 ipm. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 233 Revision 4.0 PA-16LCBW Line Circuit 5. Switch Settings Switches on the PA-16LCBW card have the following meanings. SWITCH FUNCTION SW00 (MB) SWITCH SETTING ON Circuit card make-busy OFF Circuit card make-busy cancel (normal operating mode) Circuit Card Make-busy Key SW10 (BNW0-7) ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF Note: Balancing Network Designation MEANING ON • Each element on this switch corresponds to circuit OFF #0-#7. North America, Other Country (µ Law) BNW: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) (Note) for long distance. North America, Other Country (µ Law) BNW: 600 Ω (Note) for short distance Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) and 600Ω. (For North America, Other Country (µ Law)) ON 350 OFF 1000 600 0.21 Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) CHAPTER 3 Page 234 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-16LCBW Line Circuit SWITCH No. SWITCH SW11 (BNW8-15) Balancing Network Designation • Each element on this switch corresponds to Circuit #8-#15. ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF SW14 1 2 3 4 ON OFF SW15 1 2 3 4 FUNCTION MEANING (This same as previous page) 1 OFF Fixed to OFF 2 ON Fixed to ON 3 OFF Fixed to OFF 4 OFF Fixed to OFF 1 OFF Fixed to OFF ON Stutter Dial Tone Available OFF Stutter Dial Tone not Available 3 OFF Fixed to OFF 4 OFF Fixed to OFF ON 2 OFF SWITCH SETTING ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 235 Revision 4.0 PA-16LCBW Line Circuit No. SW16 1 OFF Fixed to OFF 2 OFF Fixed to OFF 3 OFF Fixed to OFF 4 OFF Fixed to OFF 1 OFF Fixed to OFF 2 OFF Fixed to OFF ON Message Waiting Lamp Flashing (Controlled by Firmware) OFF Message Waiting Lamp lit or Flashing (Selected and Controlled by Software) 4 OFF Fixed to OFF Polarity reverse or Momentary Open (Circuit #15 Only) ON Momentary open OFF Polarity reverse 1 2 3 4 ON OFF SW17 1 2 3 4 ON OFF 3 FUNCTION Message Waiting Lamp SW18 ON OFF (RVS) (OPEN) Slide switch CHAPTER 3 Page 236 Revision 4.0 SWITCH SETTING SWITCH ND-70182 (E) MEANING PA-16LCBW Line Circuit 6. Switch Setting Sheet MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE ON SW00 (MB) SW10 (BNW0-7) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW11 (BNW8-15) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW14 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON REMARKS Note: Normal operating mode is down. ON ON PIM SW15 SW16 SW17 OFF ON SW18 (RVS) (OPEN) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 237 Revision 4.0 PA-16LCBW Line Circuit 7. External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-48. Mounting Module PIM Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT Connector Slot No. B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 LT1 LT2 LT3 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 LT4 LT5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 LT6 LT7 LT9 LT10 LT11 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 Group No. PIM Highway Block 1 2 HW0 1 HW1 2 HW2 19 18 17 16 1 23 22 21 20 2 HW3 HW4 HW5 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 1 HW6 2 See also Connecting Route Diagram. ND-70182 (E) 1 HW7 Figure 3-48 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (1/2) CHAPTER 3 Page 238 Revision 4.0 LT8 2 HW8 1 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 2 HW9 HW10 HW11 PA-16LCBW Line Circuit Mounting Module PIM Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT Connector Slot No. B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 LT4 LT5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 Group No. PIM Highway Block 3 HW0 3 HW1 HW2 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 3 HW3 HW4 HW5 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 3 HW6 3 HW7 HW8 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 3 HW9 HW10 HW11 Figure 3-48 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (2/2) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 239 Revision 4.0 PA-16LCBW Line Circuit Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-16 LCBW (LC) is as follows. MDF PBX Installation Cable LC A L1 B L2 Jack LT Connector Maximum 1200 [W] (inclusive of terminal resistance) Figure 3-49 Connecting Route Diagram CHAPTER 3 Page 240 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) Analog Terminal PA-16LCBY Line Circuit PA-16LCBY Line Circuit 1. General Function The PA-16LCBY circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 16 analog voice terminals and the system with a range of 1200 (Ohm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send “Stutter Dial Tone,” which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required. In addition, polarity reverse function is provided for 16 channels on this card. The card can be used for Caller ID service. This is a -48V card. TSW/INT C. O. LINE PUBLIC NETWORK COT (PA-8RSTY) (PA-16LCBY) RST LC Analog Terminal max. 1200 [Ω] • Loop Resistance : Max 1200[Ω] (inclusive of terminal resistance) • Reverse Function : x 16 circuits • Stutter Dial Tone/Message Waiting Lamp (selectable) • Encoding Law : A-law/µ-law Local I/O Bus CPU GT Figure 3-50 Location of PA-16LCBY(LC) Circuit card within the System 2. Mounting Location/Condition The PA-16LCBY(LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following universal slots. Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 241 Revision 4.0 PA-16LCBY Line Circuit 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches on this card is shown in Figure 3-51. OPE SW00 (MB) BL15 SW19 BL0 SW17 SW16 SW15 SW14 SW10 (BNW0-7) SW11 (BNW8-15) Figure 3-51 Face Layout of PA-16LCBY(LC) Card CHAPTER 3 Page 242 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-16LCBY Line Circuit 4. Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications of this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME LAMP COLOR LAMP STATUS OPE Green Steady Lighting The circuitry of the circuit card is operating normally. Steady Lighting Line loop exists. BL0 ~ Green Flashing BL15 5. MEANING OF INDICATION 1) Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal. 2) Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received, Busy Lamp keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line. 3) Line is in make-busy state. Busy Lamp keeps flashing at 60 ipm. Switch Settings Switches on the PA-16LCBY (LC) card have the following meanings. SWITCH FUNCTION SW00 (MB) SWITCH SETTING ON Circuit card make-busy OFF Circuit card make-busy cancel (normal operating mode) ON North America, Other Country (A/µ Law) BNW: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) (Note) for long distance Circuit Card Make-busy Key SW10 (BNW0-7) Balancing Network Designation ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF • Each element on this switch corresponds to Circuit #0-#7. MEANING When this switch OFF has been set, see SW14. ND-70182 (E) North America, Other Country (A/µ Law) BNW: 600 Ω (Note) for short distance CHAPTER 3 Page 243 Revision 4.0 PA-16LCBY Line Circuit SWITCH No. SW11 (BNW8-15) OFF SW14 SW14 SW14 SW14 SW14 -1 -2 -3 -4 ON SW15 ON OFF OFF North America Other Country (µ-Law) Selection of the User OFF OFF ON OFF Other Country (A-Law) OFF ON ON OFF Australia OFF OFF OFF ON Brazil OFF OFF ON ON China North America Brazil China Other Country ON OFF OFF Fixed to OFF ON NEAX 2400 PAD PAD ON/OFF = 9dB/0dB OFF ICS-PBX PAD PAD ON/OFF = 9dB/6dB ON Stutter Dial Tone Available OFF Stutter Dial Tone not Available 3 OFF Fixed to OFF 4 OFF Fixed to OFF 1 PAD (Australia Only) 2 CHAPTER 3 Page 244 Revision 4.0 User OFF OFF 1 2 3 4 MEANING • Each element on [the same as previous page] this switch corresponds to Circuit #8#15. 7 8 1 2 3 4 SWITCH SETTING Balancing Network Designation ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 FUNCTION ND-70182 (E) PA-16LCBY Line Circuit No. SW16 1 OFF Fixed to OFF 2 OFF Fixed to OFF 3 OFF Fixed to OFF 4 OFF Fixed to OFF 1 OFF Fixed to OFF 2 OFF Fixed to OFF ON Message Waiting Lamp Flashing (Controlled by Firmware) OFF Message Waiting Lamp lit or Flashing (Selected and Controlled by Software) 4 OFF Fixed to OFF 1 OFF Fixed to OFF 2 OFF Fixed to OFF 3 ON Fixed to ON 4 OFF Fixed to OFF ON 1 2 3 4 OFF SW17 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF 3 SW19 1 2 3 4 ON OFF Note: FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING SWITCH Message Waiting Lamp MEANING Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) and 600Ω. (For North America, Other Country (A/µ Law)) ON 350 OFF 1000 600 0.21 Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 245 Revision 4.0 PA-16LCBY Line Circuit SWITCH SETTING SHEET MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE ON SW00 (MB) SW10 (BNW0-7) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW11 (BNW8-15) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON SW17 1 2 3 4 ON SW19 1 2 3 4 ON SW14 PIM SW15 SW16 CHAPTER 3 Page 246 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) REMARKS Note: ON ON Normal operating mode is down. PA-16LCBY Line Circuit 6. External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads for this circuit card is shown below. When this circuit card is mounted in PIM, necessary leads appear on the LT connectors as follows. Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT Connector Slot No. B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 LT1 LT2 LT3 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 LT4 LT5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 Group No. 1 PIM Highway Block 2 HW0 1 HW1 2 HW2 19 18 17 16 1 23 22 21 20 2 HW3 HW4 HW5 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 1 HW6 2 1 HW7 2 HW8 1 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 2 HW9 HW10 HW11 Figure 3-52 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (PIM) (1/2) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 247 Revision 4.0 PA-16LCBY Line Circuit Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT Connector Slot No. B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 LT0 LT1 LT2 LT3 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 LT4 LT5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 LT6 LT7 LT8 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 Group No. 3 PIM Highway Block HW0 3 HW1 HW2 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 3 HW3 HW4 HW5 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 3 HW6 3 HW7 Figure 3-52 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (PIM) (2/2) CHAPTER 3 Page 248 Revision 4.0 LT9 LT10 LT11 ND-70182 (E) HW8 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 3 HW9 HW10 HW11 PA-16LCBY 7. Connecting Route Diagram Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-16 LCBY (LC) is as follows. MDF PBX Installation Cable LC A L1 B L2 Jack LT Connector Analog Terminal Maximum 1200 [W] (inclusive of terminal resistance) Figure 3-53 Connecting Route Diagram ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 249 Revision 4.0 PA-16ELCJ Electric Line Current PA-16ELCJ Electric Line Current 1. General Function The PA-16ELCJ (ELC) circuit card provides an interface between the Dterm and the IMX. Depending on the switch settings, this card works in the following two modes. • 16 ELC mode: A maximum of 16 sets of Dterms can be connected to this card (voice communications only). • 8 DLC mode: A maximum of 8 sets of Dterms can be connected to this card (simultaneous voice and data communications). 8 DLC MODE 16 ELC MODE IMX D term DTE IMX D term #0 #0 Data Adapter ELC ELC DTE D term #15 D term #7 Data Adapter Figure 3-54 Location of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card in the System There are two different kinds of firmware EPROMs are located on the PA-16ELCJ (ELC) circuit card. SP3295 16ELCJ PROG-B provides the full performance interface for Dterm Series E, and SP-3270 16ELCJ PROG-A provides Dterm Series III interface. The following table shows the Dterm performance depending on each firmware EPROM. Table 3-1 Performance Dterm SERIES E FIRMWARE SP-3295 16ELC J PROG-B SP-3270 16ELC J PROG-A CHAPTER 3 Page 250 Revision 4.0 Dterm SERIES III • 24 digits wide of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). • Month and year displays following the time and date. • 16 digits wide of LCD. • Software keys are available and the software keys are controlled by the system. Thus, key function data can be changed by office data. • Month and year are not displayed. • Software key is not available. • 16 digits wide of LCD. • Month and year are not displayed. • Software key is not available. • 16 digits wide of LCD. • Month and year are not displayed. • Software keys are available. However, key function is fixed (Off-hook Ringing, Mute, Microphone, Headset). ND-70182 (E) PA-16ELCJ Electric Line Current 2. Mounting Location/Condition The PA-16ELCJ (ELC) card can be mounted in any universal slot as shown below. Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-55. OPE SW00 (MB) PALM BL15 BL0 SW01 Figure 3-55 Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ (ELC) Card ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 251 Revision 4.0 PA-16ELCJ Electric Line Current 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME OPE PALM COLOR Green ~ Remains lit while on-line operations are normal. OFF Off when on-line operations are abnormal. Red Lights red when power supply circuit(s) is abnormal. Note OFF Off when all the power supply circuits are normal. Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flash Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state or station data has not been assigned. OFF Off when the corresponding circuit is idle. BL0 BL15 Note: STATE When the PALM lamp lights red, observe the following instructions. i) Identify the location where any in-house wires have a short circuit in all lines which belong to the PA16ELCJ card whose PALM is on. ii) Repair the short-circuited wires of the associated Dterm. iii) Disconnect the Dterm from the rosette, then leave it disconnected for at least 1 minute. iv) Connect the Dterm again. CHAPTER 3 Page 252 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-16ELCJ Electric Line Current 5. Switch Settings Switches on the PA-16ELCJ card have the following meanings. SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING Circuit card Make-busy Cancel. SW00 (MB) Circuit Card Make-busy key Circuit card Make-busy. 12345678 ON 1 See Table 3-2 below. OFF 2 - - SW01 6 12345678 12345678 — ON Always ON (fixed). OFF 8 ON 12345678 16ELC mode. 7 ELC/DLC mode Designation OFF ON 12345678 8DLC mode. OFF Table 3-2 Relationship between SW01-1 and SW01-7 SW01-7 ON OFF SW01-1 ON OFF • 16 sets of Dterms per card. • 8 sets of Dterms per card. • Voice Communication only. • Data Adapter is used. • term 16 sets of D s per card. • 8 sets of Dterms per card. • Analog Port Adapter is used, but not at the same time. • Analog Port Adapter is used (Both Dterm and Analog terminal can be used at the same time). ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 253 Revision 4.0 PA-16ELCJ Electric Line Current 6. External Interface Depending on the applied mode (16ELC/8 DLC mode), external interface leads appear on the LT connectors as follows. • 6ELC mode Mounting Module LT Connector PIM Accommodated in ① LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector Accommodated in ② LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 Slot No. A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 LT1 LT2 LT3 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 LT4 LT5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 LT6 LT7 LT9 LT10 LT11 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 Group No. PIM ① ② ① 19 18 17 16 ② ① 23 22 21 20 ② 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 ① ② ① Figure 3-56 LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) CHAPTER 3 Page 254 Revision 4.0 LT8 ND-70182 (E) ② ① 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 ② PA-16ELCJ Electric Line Current • 16ELC mode Mounting Module PIM Accommodated in ③ LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT Connector B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 LT0 Slot No. 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT1 LT2 LT3 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 LT4 LT5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 Group No. PIM ③ ③ 19 18 17 16 ③ 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 ③ ③ 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 ③ Figure 3-57 LT Connector Lead Location (16ELC Mode) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 255 Revision 4.0 PA-16ELCJ Electric Line Current 7. Switch Setting Sheet MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE ON SW00 (MB) PIM SW01 CHAPTER 3 Page 256 Revision 4.0 12345678 ND-70182 (E) ON REMARKS PA-16ELCJ-B Electronic Line Circuit PA-16ELCJ-B Electronic Line Circuit 1. General Function The PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) circuit card provides an interface between Dterm and IMX. Depending upon the switch settings, this card works in the following two modes. • 16 ELC mode: A maximum of 16 sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (voice communications only) • 8 DLC mode: A maximum of 8 sets of Dterms can be connected to this card. (simultaneous voice and data communications) 8 DLC MODE 16 ELC MODE IMX D term DTE #0 DTE term term IMX #0 Data Adapter ELC D D D term ELC #7 #15 Data Adapter Figure 3-58 Location of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card within the System Table 3-3 Performance Dterm SERIES E Dterm SERIES III • 24 digits wide of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD). • 16 digits wide of LCD. • Month and year displays following the time and date. • Month and year are not displayed. • Software keys are available and the software keys are controlled by the system. Thus, key function data can be changed by office data. • Software key is not available. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 257 Revision 4.0 PA-16ELCJ-B Electronic Line Circuit 2. Mounting Location/Condition The PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) card can be mounted in any universal slots as shown below. Mounting Module 00 3. 01 02 03 04 PIM 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-59. OPE SW00 (MB) PALM BL15 BL0 SW10 SW11 Figure 3-59 Face Layout of PA-16ELCJ-B (ELC) Card CHAPTER 3 Page 258 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) 23 PA-16ELCJ-B Electronic Line Circuit 4. Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME OPE PALM COLOR Green ~ Remains lit while on-line operations are normal. OFF Off when on-line operations are abnormal. Red Lights red when power supply circuit(s) is abnormal. Note OFF Off when all the power supply circuits are normal. Green Lights when the corresponding circuit is busy. Flash Flashes when the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state or station data has not been assigned. OFF Off when the corresponding circuit is idle. BL0 BL15 Note: STATE When the PALM lamp lights red, observe the following instructions. i) Identify the location where any in-house wires have a short circuit as to all lines which belong to the PA-16ELCJ-B card whose PALM is on. ii) Repair the short-circuited wires of the associated Dterm. iii) Disconnect the Dterm from the jack, then leave it disconnected for at least 1 minute. iv) Connect the Dterm again. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 259 Revision 4.0 PA-16ELCJ-B Electronic Line Circuit 5. Switch Settings Switches on the PA-16ELCJ-B card have the following meanings. SWITCH SW00 (MB) FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING Circuit Card Makebusy key MEANING Circuit Card Make-busy Cancel. Circuit Card Make-busy. SW10 LP-PM Interface mode setting/Group No. setting Note 12345678 ON OFF 12345678 ON OFF 1-2 12345678 12345678 In case of this circuit card is used from No. 0 to 25 group. Expanded Multiple Line Operation-Dterm is available. In case of this circuit card is used from No. 26 to 31 group (Expansion Group). Expanded Multiple Line Operation-Dterm is available. OFF In case of this circuit card is used from No. 0 to 25 group. Expanded Multiple Line Operation-Dterm is available. ON Not used ON OFF ELC/DLC mode setting 12345678 ON This circuit card operates in 16 ELC mode. OFF 3-4 12345678 ON This circuit card operates in 8 DLC mode. OFF Details are shown in next table. Do not set another combination. Analog Port Adapter setting 12345678 ON Analog Port Adapter is available. OFF 5 12345678 ON Analog Port Adapter is not available. OFF 6-8 — 12345678 ON Fixed to “OFF”. OFF SW11 1-8 — 12345678 ON Fixed to all “OFF”. OFF Note: When using firmware SP-3419, set SW10-1=OFF, SW10-2=ON. CHAPTER 3 Page 260 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-16ELCJ-B Electronic Line Circuit SW10-3: OFF, SW10-4: OFF SW10-5: OFF SW10-5: ON term s per card. • 16 set of D • Voice Communication only. term s per card. • 16 set of D • Analog Port Adapter is used (Either Dterm or Analog terminal can be used at the same time). ND-70182 (E) SW10-3: OFF, SW10-4: ON • 8 set of Dterms per card. • Data Adapter is used. • 8 set of Dterms per card. • Analog Port Adapter is used (Both Dterm and Analog terminal can be used at the same time). CHAPTER 3 Page 261 Revision 4.0 PA-16ELCJ-B Electronic Line Circuit 6. External Interface Depending upon the applied mode (16ELC/8 DLC mode), external interface leads appear on the LT connectors as follows. • 16ELC mode Mounting Module PIM LT Connector Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 Slot No. A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 LT6 LT7 LT8 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 Group No. Group No. (Expansion Group) PIM 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 27 29 31 27 29 31 26 28 30 26 28 30 1 2 1 2 HW0 1 HW1 2 HW2 1 2 HW3 HW4 HW5 HW6 1 HW7 Figure 3-60 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (1/2) CHAPTER 3 Page 262 Revision 4.0 LT9 LT10 LT11 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 01 03 05 07 09 11 Highway Block B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 ND-70182 (E) 2 HW8 1 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 2 HW9 HW10 HW11 PA-16ELCJ-B Electronic Line Circuit Mounting Module PIM Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT Connector B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 LT0 Slot No. 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 Group No. Group No. (Expansion Group) PIM Highway Block B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 27 29 31 27 29 31 26 28 30 26 28 30 3 HW0 3 HW1 3 HW2 HW3 HW4 HW5 3 HW6 3 HW7 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 3 HW8 HW9 HW10 HW11 Figure 3-60 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (16ELC Mode) (2/2) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 263 Revision 4.0 PA-16ELCJ-B Electronic Line Circuit • 8DLC mode Mounting Module PIM Accommodated in 1 LT 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 Connector Accommodated in 2 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector Accommodated in 3 LT 1, 3, 5, 7, 9, 11 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 LT Connector 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 LT0 Slot No. LT1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 LT2 LT3 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 LT4 B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 LT6 LT7 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 Group No. Group No. (Expansion Group) PIM 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 27 29 31 27 29 31 26 28 30 26 28 30 1 2 HW0 3 1 HW1 2 3 HW2 1 2 3 HW3 HW4 HW5 1 2 HW6 3 ND-70182 (E) 1 HW7 Figure 3-61 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (8DLC Mode) CHAPTER 3 Page 264 Revision 4.0 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 01 03 05 07 09 11 Highway Block LT5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 2 3 HW8 1 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 2 3 HW9 HW10 HW11 PA-16ELCJ-B 7. Switch Setting Sheet MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE ON SW00 (MB) PIM SW10 SW11 REMARKS 12345678 ON 12345678 ON ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 265 Revision 4.0 PA-24LCBV Line Circuit PA-24LCBV Line Circuit 1. General Function The PA-24LCBV circuit card provides an interface between a maximum of 24-analog terminals and the system with a range of 600 (Ohm) inclusive of terminal resistance. This card also can send “Stutter Dial Tone,” which is not a continuous tone, to an associated terminal which has no Message Waiting Lamp (MWL) instead of activating the MWL if required. INT SW C. O. LINE PUBLIC NETWORK COT (PA-24LCBV) LC Analog Terminal max. 600 [Ω] • Loop Resistance : Max 600[Ω] (inclusive of terminal resistance) • Reverse Function : x 1 circuit • Stutter Dial Tone • Message Waiting Lamp • Encoding Law : µ-law Local I/O Bus CPU GT Figure 3-62 Location of PA-24LCBV(LC) Card within the System 2. Mounting Location/Condition The PA-24LCBV(LC) circuit card can be mounted in the following shaded slots. Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 CHAPTER 3 Page 266 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-24LCBV Line Circuit 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches on this card is shown in Figure 3-63. OPE2 OPE1 SW00 (MB) SW18 BL23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 SW11 (BNW8-15) 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 SW10 (BNW0-7) BL23 BL0 CN SW13 SW12 (BNW16-23) SW15 SW14 SW17 SW16 Figure 3-63 Face Layout of PA-24LCBV(LC) Card ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 267 Revision 4.0 PA-24LCBV Line Circuit 4. Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this card are shown below. LED NAME COLOR OPE1 Green Steady Lighting The circuitry of Circuit #0-#7 is operating normally. OPE2 Green Steady Lighting The circuitry of Circuit #8-#23 is operating normally. Steady Lighting Line loop exists. Flashing 1) Ringing signal is being transmitted. Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with on/off of the ringing signal. 2) Dial pulses are being received. While dial pulses from a line are being received. Busy LED keeps flashing in synchronizing with the dial pulses coming from the line. 3) Line is in make-busy state. Busy LED keeps flashing at 60 ipm. BL0 ~ BL23 5. Green LED STATUS DESCRIPTION Switch Settings Switches on the PA-24LCBV(LC) card have the following meanings. SWITCH FUNCTION SW00 (MB) Balancing Network Designation ON 7 8 OFF CHAPTER 3 Page 268 Revision 4.0 MEANING ON Circuit card make-busy OFF Circuit card make-busy cancel (normal operating mode) ON North America, Other Country (A/µ Law) BNW: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) Note for long distance. Circuit Card Make-busy Key SW10 (BNW0-7) 1 2 3 4 5 6 SWITCH SETTING • Each element on this switch corresponds to Circuit OFF #0-#7. ND-70182 (E) North America, Other Country (A/µ Law) BNW: 600 Ω Note for short distance PA-24LCBV Line Circuit SWITCH No. SW11 (BNW8-15) SW12 (BMW16-23) Balancing Network Designation ON • Each element on [the same as previous page] this switch corresponds to Circuit #16-#23. 7 8 OFF SW13 1 2 3 4 ON Selection of the User SW13 SW13 SW13 SW13 -1 -2 -3 -4 ON OFF 1 SW14 1 2 3 4 MEANING • Each element on [the same as previous page] this switch corresponds to Circuit #8-#15. 7 8 OFF 1 2 3 4 5 6 SWITCH SETTING Balancing Network Designation ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 FUNCTION Stutter Dial Tone OFF OFF North America OFF OFF Fixed to OFF ON Stutter Dial tone Available OFF Stutter Dial tone not Available ON 2 OFF 3 OFF Fixed to OFF 4 OFF Fixed to OFF ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 269 Revision 4.0 PA-24LCBV Line Circuit No. SW15 1 OFF Fixed to OFF 2 OFF Fixed to OFF 3 OFF Fixed to OFF 4 OFF Fixed to OFF 1 OFF Fixed to OFF 2 OFF Fixed to OFF ON Message Waiting Lamp Flashing (Controlled by Firmware) OFF Message Waiting Lamp lit or Flashing (Selected and Controlled by Software) 4 OFF Fixed to OFF 1 OFF Fixed to OFF 2 OFF Fixed to OFF 3 OFF Fixed to OFF 4 OFF Fixed to OFF 5 OFF Fixed to OFF 6 OFF Fixed to OFF 7 OFF Fixed to OFF 8 OFF Fixed to OFF ON 1 2 3 4 OFF SW16 ON 1 2 3 4 OFF 3 SW17 ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF CHAPTER 3 Page 270 Revision 4.0 FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING SWITCH Message Waiting Lamp ND-70182 (E) MEANING PA-24LCBV Line Circuit SWITCH No. FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING SW18 ON OFF (RVS) (OPEN) Slide switch MEANING ON Momentary open OFF Polarity reverse Polarity reverse or Momentary Open Note 1: Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464A) and 600Ω are composed as follows. ON 350 OFF 1000 600 0.21 Compromise Impedance (EIA/TIA-464B) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 271 Revision 4.0 PA-24LCBV Line Circuit 6. Switch Setting Sheet MODULE SLOT No. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE ON SW00 (MB) SW10 (BNW0-7) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW11 (BNW8-15) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW12 (BNW16-23) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW13 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON 1 2 3 4 ON Note: ON ON ON PIM SW14 SW15 SW16 SW17 1 2 3 4 5 6 OFF 7 8 ON ON SW18 (RVS) CHAPTER 3 Page 272 Revision 4.0 (OPEN) ND-70182 (E) REMARKS Normal operating mode is down. PA-24LCBV Line Circuit 7. External Interface Accommodation of the LT connector leads and LC connector leads for this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-64. (1) PIM When this circuit card is mounted in PIM, necessary leads appear on the LT connectors as follows. Located in Located in LT 4, LT10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 LT0 LT Connector Slot No. B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 LT 5, LT11 Connector A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 LT1 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 LT4 LT5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 Group No. 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 4 5 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 PIM Highway Block 0 1 2 3 6 7 8 9 10 11 Figure 3-64 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (PIM) (1/2) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 273 Revision 4.0 PA-24LCBV Line Circuit Located in LT 5, LT 11 Connector LT 4, LT10 Connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT0 LT Connector Slot No. B8 B9 B10 B11 B12 B13 B14 B15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 LT1 B16 B17 B18 B19 B20 B21 B22 B23 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 A16 A17 A18 A19 A20 A21 A22 A23 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 Group No. 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 4 5 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 PIM Highway Block 0 1 2 3 6 7 Figure 3-64 LT Connector Lead Accommodation (PIM) (2/2) CHAPTER 3 Page 274 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) 8 9 10 11 PA-24LCBV Line Circuit (2) LC Connector Leads LC Connector (1) CONN1 PKG1 Champ Connector LT 1A A0 1B B0 26 B0 1 A0 2A A1 2B B1 27 B1 2 A1 3A A2 3B 4A A3 4B B2 28 B2 3 A2 B3 29 B3 4 A3 5A A4 5B B4 30 B4 5 A4 6A A5 6B B5 31 B5 6 A5 7A A6 7B B6 32 B6 7 A6 8A A7 8B B7 33 B7 8 A7 34 B0 9 A0 35 B1 10 A1 36 B2 11 A2 LC CABLE LC Connector (2) CONN2 PKG2 1A A0 1B B0 37 B3 12 A3 2A A1 2B B1 38 B4 13 A4 3A A2 3B B2 39 B5 14 A5 4A A3 4B B3 40 B6 15 A6 5A A4 5B B4 41 B7 16 A7 6A A5 6B B5 42 B0 17 A0 7A A6 7B B6 43 B1 18 A1 8A A7 8B B7 44 B2 19 A2 45 B3 20 A3 46 B4 21 A4 47 B5 22 A5 48 B6 23 A6 49 B7 24 A7 LC Connector (3) CONN3 1A PKG3 A0 1B B0 2A A1 2B B1 3A A2 3B B2 4A A3 4B B3 5A A4 5B B4 6A A5 6B B5 7A A6 7B B6 8A A7 8B B7 50 PKG1 PKG2 PKG3 25 Figure 3-65 LC Connector Lead Accommodation (LC Cable) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 275 Revision 4.0 PA-24LCBV Line Circuit 8. Connecting Route Diagram Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24LCBV(LC) is as follows: Note: A and B leads for Channels #0 - #7 appear from the LC Connector equipped on the front edge of the card. LT Connector PBX MDF Installation Cable A8 L1 B8 L2 PA-24LCBV A23 L1 B23 L2 Jack Analog Terminal Jack Analog Terminal Maximum 600 [ ] (inclusive of terminal resistance) Maximum 600 [ ] (inclusive of terminal resistance) Installation Cable A0 L1 B0 L2 Jack Analog Terminal Jack Analog Terminal LT Connector LC Cable A7 L1 B7 L2 Figure 3-66 Connecting Route Diagram for the PA-24LCBV (LC) CHAPTER 3 Page 276 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-24LCBV Line Circuit 9. LC Cable Connection 3m Earth Cable Figure 3-67 Outer View of LC Cable ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 277 Revision 4.0 PA-24LCBV Line Circuit PA-24LCBV LC Cable LC Cable LC Cable Earth Plate NT FRO Earth Cable R LT Cable Figure 3-68 Cable Running of LC Cable (Example) CHAPTER 3 Page 278 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) REA PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler 1. General Function This circuit card is a protocol converter to carry the fusion-link-data from/to the other node. The FusionLink-Data is received/transferred from/to the CPR via HUB (PA-M96) across the TCP/IP interface. Once the FCH has received the fusion-link-data from the CPR, the HDLC CONT part of the FCH converts it to the High Level Data Link Controller (HDLC) format, then drops and inserts (D/I) onto a particular channel (or channels) of the ITU-T G.703 digital interface. RJ-45 ETHER NET CONT CPU HDLC CONT BWB LP-PM INT FRONT CABLE D/I CONT DTI CONT Note FCH TO/FROM THE OTHER FUSION NODE DTI HUB (PA-M96) CPU LANI (PZ-PC19) CPR Note: This connector is used when multiple numbers of FCH cards are cascaded. Figure 3-69 Location ofPA-FCHA (FCH) Card in the System ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 279 Revision 4.0 PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler 2. Mounting Location/ Condition The FCH can be mounted in a universal slot of the PIM. Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PIM Universal Slots 3. Universal Slots Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown below. OPE MB LYR LB LOAD SW14 SW13 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 EST3 EST2 EST1 EST0 PWALM MNT 10-BASE-T MODE SW12 SW11 SW10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 DTI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 FCH 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 3-70 Face Layout of PA-FCHA (FCH) Card CHAPTER 3 Page 280 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Green Remains lit while the Fusion link is established. Flash Flashes when the Fusion link test result is fair. (60IPM) OFF Remains off when either the Fusion link is not established or the Fusion link test result is not fair. LYR STATE Green Remains lit while 10-BASE-T port is ready to use. LB OFF Remains off when 10-BASE-T port is not ready. Green Remains lit while this circuit card is ready to broadcast data packets. (Forwarding Status) Flash (60 IPM) Remains lit while this circuit card is ready to broadcast data packets. (Blocking Status) Flash (120 IPM) Remains lit while this circuit card is stand-by to broadcast data packets. (Learning Status) OFF Remains off when this circuit card is stand-by to broadcast data packets. (Null Status) LOAD EST3 Green Remains lit while sending data. EST2 Green Remains lit when receiving pair cable polarity is normal. EST1 Green Remains lit while receiving data. EST0 Green Remains lit while the link is established. PWALM Red 5. Remains lit when power supply failure (from the BWB) has occurred. Switch setting Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME MB Note SWITCH NO SETTING STANDARD SETTING UP DOWN DESCRIPTION Circuit card Make-busy. × Circuit card Make-busy cancel. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 281 Revision 4.0 PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler SWITCH NAME MNT Note: SWITCH NO SETTING STANDARD SETTING 0 OFF × Not used. 1 OFF × Not used. 2 OFF × Not used. 3 Note ON DESCRIPTION Make-busy-request. OFF × Cancel the Make-busy-request. The following operations are required prior to extracting the card. (1.) Turn on the MNT3 switch. (2.) Flip the MB switch. SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SETTING 0-7 DESCRIPTION Not used. × 8 Standard setting. (When the DTI is connected with the card front cable.) MODE Fusion link test mode. (When the DTI is connected with the card front cable.) 9 A-F Not used. When the D/I DTI (1.5M) is connected with the card front cable. STANDARD SETTING SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO SW10 1 Note OFF × T203 timer value is fixed at 10 seconds. 2~8 OFF × Not used. Note: SETTING ON DESCRIPTION T203 timer value is variable. T203 timer designates the maximum idle time which does not transmit any data frames. As a basic rule, the shorter T203 timer value, the earlier link failure detection will be obtained. CHAPTER 3 Page 282 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO SETTING STANDARD SETTING DESCRIPTION ON 1 OFF ON This SW designates the D/I channel of the Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n) 2 OFF ON Set the corresponding SW(s) to “ON” for D/I, “OFF” for denial. 3 OFF SW11 ON SW11 Note 1 4 OFF D/I channel of T1 SW11-1 CH 0 SW11-2 CH 1 ON SW11-3 CH2 OFF SW11-4 CH 3 ON SW11-5 CH 4 SW11-6 CH 5 SW11-7 CH 6 SW11-8 CH 7 5 6 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 283 Revision 4.0 PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO SETTING ON 1 OFF ON 2 STANDARD SETTING DESCRIPTION This SW designates the D/I channel of the Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n) Set the corresponding SW(s) to “ON” for D/I, “OFF” for denial. OFF ON 3 OFF SW12 ON 4 OFF SW12 Note 1 ON 5 OFF ON 6 D/I channel of T1 SW12-1 CH 8 SW12-2 CH 9 SW12-3 CH 10 SW12-4 CH 11 SW12-5 CH 12 SW12-6 CH 13 SW12-7 CH 14 SW12-8 CH 15 OFF ON 7 OFF ON 8 OFF Note 1: When “n” is bigger than 1, the Time Slot Sequence Integrity (TSSI) must be guaranteed at the network. When “n” is one or more, the corresponding D channels as “n” must be designated by SW11-SW12. CHAPTER 3 Page 284 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO SETTING STANDARD SETTING ON DESCRIPTION This SW designates the D/I channel of the Fusion-Link-Data. (The number of D/I channels = n) 1 OFF Set the corresponding SW(s) to “ON” for D/I, “OFF” for denial. ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF ON SW13 OFF SW13-1 CH 16 ON SW13-2 CH 17 OFF SW13-3 CH 18 SW13-4 CH 19 SW13-5 CH 20 SW13-6 CH 21 SW13-7 CH 22 SW13-8 CH 23 4 SW13 5 ON 6 OFF ON 7 OFF D/I channel of T1 ON 8 OFF ON × Positive logic for the D/I CONT 1 OFF ON Negative logic for the D/I CONT × 2 Note 2 The fusion data link speed inserted onto the T1 interface. SW14-2 OFF SW14 ON × 3 Note 2 SW14-3 SPEED ON ON 64 Kbps × n ON OFF 56 Kbps × n OFF ON 48 Kbps × n OFF OFF Not used OFF 4 Note 3 ON Link Access Protocol D-channel (LAPD) signal link performs as the “network.” OFF LAPD signal link performs as the “user.” ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 285 Revision 4.0 PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler Note 2: Data speed 64 kbps is used for the T1 or E1 interface. Data speed 56 kbps is used for the T1 interface with bit stealing. Data speed 48 kbps is used for the T1 interface with both bit stealing and the Zero Code Suppression (or Bit 7 Stuffing). Note 3: When a node is set “network,” the distant node over the fusion link should be set “user,” and vice versa. 6. External Interface The cable connections among the FCH, HUB, 24DTR are shown in Figure 3-71. FCH 24DTR DTI FCH CN2 10AL (10) FLT CA 10 BASE-T straight cable HUB Figure 3-71 FCH/HUB/DTI Connection CHAPTER 3 Page 286 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler See the following figure when multiple numbers of FCH circuit cards are connected to a 24DTR as a cascade connection. The FCH can be combined with CCH/DCH on a cascade connection. One DTI card can have a maximum of five (5) Handler circuits cascaded within the FCH card, the CCH card, and/or DCH card. Since the FCH card contains one Handler circuit per card, a maximum of five (5) FCH cards can be cascaded to a DTI card. As an example, the following (a), (b) and (c) can coexist on a cascade connection. (a) FCH card (One (1) Handler circuit card per card) (b) CCH card (Two (2) Handler circuits per card) (c) DCH card (Two (2) Handler circuits per card) Also, you must consider the cascading cable length. Note Max. 5 handling circuits of FCH/CCH/DCH 24DTR CN2 FCH FCH Note FCH DTI DTI DTI FCH FCH FCH To the next FCH/CCH/DCH To HUB Figure 3-72 FCH Cascade Connection Note: A maximum cable distance between DTI and the last cascaded FCH (or CCH/DCH) is 50 cm (1’ 7.6 ”). ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 287 Revision 4.0 PA-FCHA Fusion Call Control Handler 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ON MB OFF MNT ON MODE 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON SW10 ON SW11 ON SW12 ON SW13 SW14 CHAPTER 3 Page 288 Revision 4.0 1 2 3 4 ON ND-70182 (E) PA-M96 HUB PA-M96 HUB 1. General Function This circuit card provides the repeater function which is based on ANSI/IEEE 802.3. Eight (8) of the 10BASE-T ports are located on a HUB card. As seen from the functional connection diagram below, the HUB card is located between the CPR (LANI) and the FCH card. The HUB card distributes the Fusion link data onto FCH cards. TO/FROM THE OTHER FUSION DTI NODE FCH 10BASE-T cross cable is used HUB for cascade connection (PA-M96) CPU LANI (PZ-PC19) CPR #0 CPU LANI (PZ-PC19) CPR #1 HUB (PA-M96) 10BASE-T straight cable FCH TO/FROM THE OTHER FUSION DTI NODE Note: This figure shows the fusion link with full redundancy (N+1) configuration. Note: This figure shows the fusion link with full redundancy (N+1) configuration. Figure 3-73 Location ofPA-M96 (HUB) Card in the System ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 289 Revision 4.0 PA-M96 HUB 2. Mounting Location/Condition The PA-M96 (HUB) card can be mounted in any universal slot of PIM0 as shown below. Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 PIM0 Universal Slots Universal Slots 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors is shown in Figure 3-74. OPE MB ST7 CRS7 ST0 CRS0 SENS x TP7-X x TP6-X x TP5-X x TP4-X x TP3-X x TP2-X x TP1-X x TP0-X Figure 3-74 Face Layout of PA-M96 (HUB) Card CHAPTER 3 Page 290 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-M96 HUB 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR STATE OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in normal operation. CRS0~CRS7 Green Lights when the circuit card detects the carrier signal form the TPn-X port. The meanings of the ST0~ST7 lamps vary depending on the SEL switch settings as shown in the table below. SEL SWITCH ST0~ST7 MEANINGS 0 Lights when the receiving pair cable polarity of the TPn-X port is reversed. (n = 0~7) Note 1 2 Lights when the 10 BASE-T (RJ-45) cable is attached to the TPn-X port, and the TCP/IP link has been established. The lamp may light regardless of the receiving pair cable polarity. (n = 0~7) Green Lights when the TPn-X port is normal. 3 Remains off when collisions have occurred at the TPn-X port. (n = 0~7) Note 2 Note 1: This lamp is used to indicate the status of the TPn-X port. Therefore, the circuit card operates normally regardless of the cable polarity. Note 2: This circuit card can detect data packet collisions at a TPn-X port when it would be a collision of 2048bit- times (2.048 ms) or when the packet collides 32 times consecutively. The port is then locked-out until the collision is over. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 291 Revision 4.0 PA-M96 HUB 5. Switch Setting Standard settings for switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SETTING STANDARD SETTING UP MB DOWN SENSE Circuit card Make-busy. × Circuit card Make-busy cancel. 0 Polarity indication on the STn lamps for TPn-X ports (n = 0~7). 1 Not used. 2 3 4-F CHAPTER 3 Page 292 Revision 4.0 DESCRIPTION × TPn-X ports operate as a repeater HUB. (n = 0~7). Data-Packet-Collision indication on the STn lamps for TPn-X ports (n = 0~7). Not used ND-70182 (E) PA-M96 HUB 6. External Interface FCH 24DTR DTI HUB FCH CN2 10AL (10) FLT CA 10 BASE-T straight Cable PZ-PC19 (LANI) 10 BASE-T straight Cable ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 293 Revision 4.0 PA-M96 HUB 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ON MB SEL CHAPTER 3 Page 294 Revision 4.0 2 ND-70182 (E) PA-8RSTM Register Sender Trunk PA-8RSTM Register Sender Trunk 1. Function This circuit card is an 8-circuit register sender trunk card that transmits and sends selective signals (DP signals, PB signals, MF signals). LC ATI TSW Station COT C.O. Line TLT Tie Line ATT RST Figure 3-75 Location of the PA-8RSTM Card in the System ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 295 Revision 4.0 PA-8RSTM Register Sender Trunk 2. Mounting Location/Condition The mounting locations for this circuit card and the conditions related to mounting are shown below. Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Note: 3. Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors for this circuit card is shown below. SW10 SW11 OPE MB ~ BLS7 BLS4 ~ MBS7 SW04 MBS4 ~ BLR7 BLR4 ~ MBR7 SW03 MBR4 ~ BLS3 BLS0 ~ MBS3 SW02 MBS0 ~ BLR3 BLR0 ~ MBR3 MBR0 CHAPTER 3 Page 296 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) SW01 PA-8RSTM Register Sender Trunk 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR OPE Green ~ BLR0 BLR7 ~ BLS0 BLS7 5. STATE Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Red Lights when the corresponding circuit has received the selective signals. Flash Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state. OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle. Red Lights when the corresponding circuit has sent the selective signals. Flash Flashes (60 IPM) when the corresponding circuit is in Make-busy state. OFF Remains off while the corresponding circuit is idle. Switch Settings Standard settings for various switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. STANDARD SETTING UP MB DOWN 0 1 MBR0~3 (SW01) 2 3 4 MBR4~7 (SW03) SETTING 5 6 Circuit card Make-busy. × ON OFF × × × × × Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. × ON OFF Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. ON OFF Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. ON OFF Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. ON OFF Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. ON OFF Circuit card Make-busy cancel. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. ON OFF MEANING Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. × Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 297 Revision 4.0 PA-8RSTM Register Sender Trunk SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. MBR4~7 (SW03) 7 0 1 MBS0~3 (SW02) 2 3 4 5 MBS4~7 (SW04) 6 7 CHAPTER 3 Page 298 Revision 4.0 SETTING STANDARD SETTING ON OFF Register Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. × ON OFF × × × × × × Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. × ON OFF Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. ON OFF Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. ON OFF Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. ON OFF Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. ON OFF Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. ON OFF Register Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. ON OFF MEANING Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. Sender Make-busy of the corresponding circuit. × Sender Make-busy cancel of the corresponding circuit. ND-70182 (E) PA-8RSTM Register Sender Trunk SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. SETTING STANDARD SETTING MEANING ON SELECTION OF PBR THRESHOLD VALUE 1 OFF SW0-1 SW0-2 SW0-3 ON ON ON -21 dBm0 OFF ON ON -23 dBm0 ON OFF ON -25 dBm0 OFF OFF ON -27 dBm0 ON ON OFF -29 dBm0 (Standard Setting) OFF ON OFF -31 dBm0 ON OFF OFF -33 dBm0 OFF OFF OFF -35 dBm0 ON 2 OFF ON 3 OFF PBR THRESHOLD VALUE ON SW10 4 SELECTION OF MFR THRESHOLD VALUE OFF ON MFR THRESHOLD VALUE SW0-4 SW0-5 SW0-6 ON ON ON -17 dBm0 OFF ON ON -19 dBm0 ON OFF ON -21 dBm0 OFF OFF ON -23 dBm0 (Standard Setting) ON ON OFF -25 dBm0 OFF ON OFF -27 dBm0 ON OFF OFF -29 dBm0 OFF OFF OFF -31 dBm0 5 OFF ON 6 OFF 7 OFF × Threshold value is not selected (Fixed to OFF). 8 ON × Fixed ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 299 Revision 4.0 PA-8RSTM Register Sender Trunk SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. 1 SETTING STANDARD SETTING ON MFR Receive Specification; AT&T OFF MFR Receive Specification; ITU-T No. 5 ON PBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal Shut Down Protect Timer) SHORT (Shorter than 10 ms.) OFF PBR PULSE TIMER (Momentary Signal Shut Down Protect Timer) LONG (Shorter than 20 ms.) 2 3 SW11 4 5 6 CHAPTER 3 Page 300 Revision 4.0 MEANING OFF × Fixed ON Register Selection; REG 0, 1, 2, 3 of MFR. OFF Register Selection; REG 0, 1, 2, 3 of PBR. ON Register Selection; REG 4, 5, 6, 7 of MFR. OFF Register Selection; REG 4, 5, 6, 7 of PBR. ON × OFF DPR Receive Specification; General Spec. DPR Receive Specification; Australian Spec. 7 OFF × No setting (Fixed to OFF) 8 OFF × Fixed ND-70182 (E) PA-8RSTM Register Sender Trunk 6. Switch Setting Sheet MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ON MBR0-3 (SW01) 3 2 1 0 ON MBR4-7 (SW03) 3 2 1 0 ON MBS0-3 (SW02) 3 2 1 0 PIM ON MBS4-7 (SW04) 3 2 1 0 SW10 ON 12 3 456 7 8 SW11 ON 12 3 456 7 8 MB DOWN ND-70182 (E) Circuit card Make-busy cancel CHAPTER 3 Page 301 Revision 4.0 PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk 1. General Function The PA-8RSTY circuit card is equipped with eight circuits of Registers and Senders. More specifically, this card contains Dial Pulse Register (DPR), Push Button Receiver (PBR) for receiving digits from extensions and/or the associated incoming trunks and Dial Pulse Sender (DPS), PB Signal Sender (PBS) for sending digits to a distant switching system. In addition, this card has “Register Sender” function, by which interdigit pause can be changed and PB signals may be converted to DP signals and vice versa without intervention of the CPU. The card can be used for caller ID service. This figure shows “Register Sender” function as an example. PA-8RSTY INT TSW INT PB line PBR OGT NETWORK PB Signal PBS OFF HOOK (LC for Calling Number Delivery) DP Signal LC DPR DPS DP Telephone Caller ID signals I/O Local Bus CPU GT PBR: Push Button Receiver PBS: PB Signal Sender DPR: Dial Pulse Register DPS: Dial Pulse Sender Figure 3-76 Location of PA-8RSTY (RST) Within the System CHAPTER 3 Page 302 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk 2. Mounting Location/Condition The PA-8RSTY (RST) card can be mounted any universal slots as shown below. Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Note: 3. Indicates universal slots for line/trunk circuit cards. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors on this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-77. Note: Layout of Lamps and switches are differ from other RST cards. OPE SW00 (MB) BLS7 BLS4 BLS3 BLS0 BLS7 SW10 SW11 1 2 3 4 BLS4 1 2 3 4 SW14 SW13 1 2 3 4 SW16 SW17 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 BLS3 BLS0 SW15 SW12 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 SW02 SW01 Figure 3-77 Face Layout of PA-8RSTY (RST) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 303 Revision 4.0 PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk 4. Lamp Indications The contents of lamp indications on this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR OPE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating. Green Lights when the corresponding circuit has received the selective signals. Flash Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state. OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle. ~ BLR0 BLR7 ~ BLS0 BLS7 CHAPTER 3 Page 304 Revision 4.0 STATE Green Lights when the corresponding circuit has sent the selective signals. Flash Flashes (60 IPM) while the corresponding circuit is in make-busy state. OFF Remains off when the corresponding circuit is idle. ND-70182 (E) PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk 5. Switch Settings Standard settings of switches on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SWIT CH NO. SW02 (MBS0-7) STANDARD SETTING UP MB (SW00) SW01 (MBR0-7) SETTING DOWN 0 ON 0 OFF 1 ON 1 OFF 2 ON 2 OFF 3 ON 3 OFF 4 ON 4 OFF 5 ON 5 OFF 6 ON 6 OFF 7 ON 7 OFF 0 ON 0 OFF 1 ON 1 OFF 2 ON 2 OFF 3 ON 3 OFF 4 ON 4 OFF 5 ON 5 OFF 6 ON 6 OFF 7 ON 7 OFF MEANING Circuit card make busy × Circuit card make busy cancel Register make busy of the corresponding circuit × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Register make busy of the corresponding circuit × Register make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit Sender make busy of the corresponding circuit × Sender make busy cancel of the corresponding circuit ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 305 Revision 4.0 PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk SWITCH FUNCTION SWITCH SETTING MEANING SW10 1 2 3 4 Selection of PBR Threshold Value ~ 1 3 4 1 2 3 4 DTMF Signal Receiver Threshold Value ON OFF [Standard Setting] OFF SW10-1 SW10-2 SW10-3 DTMF Threshold Value ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF -21.0 dBm0 -23.0 dBm0 -25.0 dBm0 -27.0 dBm0 -29.0 dBm0 -31.0 dBm0 -33.0 dBm0 -35.0 dBm0 Fixed to OFF SW11 1 2 3 4 Selection of MFR Threshold Value ~ 1 1 2 3 4 ON OFF MFR Signal Receiver Threshold Value [Standard Setting] 3 4 CHAPTER 3 Page 306 Revision 4.0 OFF ND-70182 (E) SW11-1 SW11-2 SW11-3 MFR Threshold Value ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF Fixed to OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF -17.0 dBm0 -19.0 dBm0 -21.0 dBm0 -23.0 dBm0 -25.0 dBm0 -27.0 dBm0 -29.0 dBm0 -31.0 dBm0 PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk SWITCH FUNCTION SW12 1 2 3 4 1 2 Designation of MFR Specification DTMF Signal Cut-off Guard Timer SWITCH SETTING MEANING 1 2 3 4 • AT & T specification 1 2 3 4 • ITU-T No. 5 specification 1 2 3 4 • SHORT (less than 10 ms) 1 2 3 4 • LONG (less than 20 ms) 1 2 3 4 • REG #0, #1, #2, #3 function as MFR. 1 2 3 4 • REG #0, #1, #2, #3 function as PBR. 1 2 3 4 • REG #4, #5, #6, #7 function as MFR. 1 2 3 4 • REG #4, #5, #6, #7 function as PBR. [Standard Setting] 3 4 Register Selection (MFR/PBR) Register Selection (MFR/PBR) ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 307 Revision 4.0 PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk SWITCH SWITCH NO. 1 SW13 SW14 SW15 SETTING MEANING ON MF Transmission Level:-9dBm OFF MF Transmission Level:-5dBm 2 OFF × Fixed to OFF 3 OFF × Fixed to OFF 4 OFF × Fixed to OFF 1 OFF × Fixed to OFF 2 OFF × Fixed to OFF 3 OFF × Fixed to OFF 4 OFF × Fixed to OFF 1 OFF × Fixed to OFF 2 OFF × Fixed to OFF 3 OFF × Fixed to OFF 4 OFF × Fixed to OFF 1 ON × Fixed to ON 2 OFF × Fixed to OFF 3 OFF × Fixed to OFF 4 OFF × Fixed to OFF 1 OFF × Fixed to OFF 2 OFF × Fixed to OFF 3 OFF × Fixed to OFF 4 OFF × Fixed to OFF SW16 SW17 CHAPTER 3 Page 308 Revision 4.0 STANDARD SETTING ND-70182 (E) PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS Circuit card make busy cancel. SW00 (MB) Standard Setting: Down OFF 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SW01 (MBR0-7) OFF PIM 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 SW02 (MBS0-7) ON 1 2 3 4 SW10 ON 1 2 3 4 SW11 ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 309 Revision 4.0 PA-8RSTY Register Sender Trunk MODULE SLOT NO. SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE ON 1 2 3 4 SW12 ON SW13 ON SW14 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 PIM ON SW15 ON SW16 ON SW17 CHAPTER 3 Page 310 Revision 4.0 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 ND-70182 (E) REMARKS PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk 1. General Function The PA-SDTA circuit card provides a maximum of 28 interface (1.5 Mbps) used with the fiber optic cable. This card has also the MUX function and is connected directly to the TSW card. This card is used with the PA-SDTB card. Fusion Link with FCCH Fusion Node-A Node-B Fiber Optic Cable SDTA FCH S D T B Connection Link (Data Link) + Connection Trunk (Speech Path) SDTA Fiber Optic Cable SDTA FCH S D T B SDTA For Dual Configuration Internal LAN Internal LAN Fusion Link without FCCH Fusion Node-A Node-B Fiber Optic Cable SDTA S D T B Connection Trunk (Speech Path) SDTA Fiber Optic Cable SDTA S D T B SDTA For Dual Configuration Internal LAN SDH/SONET Digital Trunk * ) SDT: FCH: Fusion Call Control Handler Figure 3-78 Location of PA-SDTA (SDT) Card in the System ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 311 Revision 4.0 PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk 2. Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card is mounted in a universal slot next to (either left or right side of) PA-SDTB. When this card is provided in a dual configuration, mount this card on both sides of PA-SDTB. Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Universal Slots Universal Slots Mounting conditions are shown below. • Only the power is supplied from Back Wiring Board (BWB). • This card is connected to the PA-SDTB card using the following front cables. • For single configuration: SDT CABLEB • For dual configuration: SDT CABLEA• Fiber optic cables are connected to this card. • Time slots used for this circuit card are determined by the cable connection between the PA-SDTB and TSW. CHAPTER 3 Page 312 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk When the PA-SDTA card is mounted in the 1-IMG system As shown in Figure 3-79, time slots of Module Group 01 are used. AUNT data is required even if PIM2/ PIM3 is not actually mounted. PIM3 (Not actually mounted) ( TS of PIM3 is used for SDT. ) PIM2 (Not actually mounted) ( TS of PIM2 is used for SDT. ) PIM0 MUX1A MUX0B MUX MUX1B MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 MUX PH-PC30 (MUX) MUX0A PH-SW10 (TSW) PIM1 PCM PA-SDTB (SDTB) PCM PH-PC30 (MUX) I/O PH-SW10 (TSW) I/O PA-SDTA (SDTA) Example: MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 LPM Figure 3-79 PA-SDTA Card Mounted in the 1 IMG System ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 313 Revision 4.0 PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout for lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-80. OPE ACT MB PALM OPT SYNC LPB P-SW I/O PCM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW11 SW12 SC Figure 3-80 Face Layout of PA-SDTA (SDT) CHAPTER 3 Page 314 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below. LAMP NAME COLOR STATE Green Remains lit while this circuit card is operating normally. Red Remains lit while this circuit card is in Make-busy state. PALM Red Lights when the OBP in this circuit card is abnormal. OPT Red Lights when the optical input signals are cut off. SYNC Red Lights when receiving 52 Mbps clock synchronization. LPB Green Lights when Loop-back is designated. Green Remains lit while this circuit card is in active state. OPE ACT 5. Off Remains off while this circuit card is in stand-by state. Switch Settings Switch settings on this circuit card are shown in the table below. SWITCH NAME SWITCH NO. Circuit card Make-busy × Circuit card Make-busy cancel 1 OFF × Fixed 2 ON × Fixed 3 ON × Fixed 4 OFF × Fixed 5 OFF × Not used 6 8 1-8 1 P-SW MEANING DOWN 7 SW12 STANDARD SETTING UP MB SW11 SETTING 2 3 4 ON OFF PAD function is effective. × ON PAD function is not effective. Setting of A-law OFF × Setting of µ-law ON × OPT#0 Act (This card is used for System 0) OFF OFF OPT#1 Act (This card is used for System 1) × ON OFF Not used Designation of OLLPB (OPT Local Loop-back) × ON Designation of OLLPB cancel Designation of ORLPB (OPT Remote Loop-back) OFF × Designation of ORLPB cancel. OFF × Not used ON OFF Make-busy request × Make-busy request cancel ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 315 Revision 4.0 PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk 6. External Interface • Cable Connection PA-SDTA PA-SDTB Fiber optic cable SDT CABLEB Note1 Note: When the PA-SDTA card is provided in a dual configuration, SDT CABLEA (D) is used. Figure 3-81 Cable Connection between PA-SDTAand PA-SDTB CHAPTER 3 Page 316 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk • Accommodation for the LT connector leads of this circuit card is shown in Figure 3-82. Mounting Module PIM Accommodated in ➀ Accommodated in ➁ Accommodated in ➂ LT2, 4, 8, 10 connector LT1, 5, 7, 11 connector LT3, 5, 9, 11 connector 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 POUT B 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 POUT A 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 POUT B 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 POUT A 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 POUT B POUT A Note: The output of POUT A/B is 1,544 MHz. LT0 LT connector Slot No. LT1 LT2 LT3 LT4 LT6 LT7 LT8 LT9 LT10 LT11 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 Group No. PIM Highway Block LT5 1 2 0 3 1 1 2 3 2 1 3 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 2 3 4 5 15 14 13 00 02 04 06 08 10 12 01 03 05 07 09 11 1 2 6 3 1 7 2 3 8 1 19 18 17 16 23 22 21 20 2 3 9 10 11 Figure 3-82 LT Connector Lead Accommodation ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 317 Revision 4.0 PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk • When the PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB card is mounted in the 1-IMG system As shown in the following figure, time slots of Module Group 01 are used. AUNT data is required even if PIM2/PIM3 is not actually mounted. PIM3 (Not actually mounted) ( TS of PIM3 is used for SDT. ) PIM2 (Not actually mounted) ( TS of PIM2 is used for SDT. ) Note MT24 TSW CA-140 MUX1A MUX0B MUX MUX1B MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 MUX PH-PC30 (MUX) MUX0A PH-SW10 (TSW) PIM0 PA-SDTB (SDTB) PIM1 PCM PA-SDTA (SDTA) PCM PH-PC30 (MUX) I/O PH-SW10 (TSW) I/O MUX3 MUX2 MUX1 LPM Note: When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in PIM0, MT24 TSW CA-90 is used. Figure 3-83 Example of Cable Connection for 1-IMG System CHAPTER 3 Page 318 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk • When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in the 4-IMG system (a) When to use the 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x cable: When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB cards are mounted in the 4-IMG system, the 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x cable is used for connection between the PA-SDTB and TSW. The type of cable varies depending on the mounting location of the PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB card(s). Table 3-4 Type of 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x Cable IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 PIM3 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-J PIM2 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H 34PH MT24 TSW CA-I PIM1 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F 34PH MT24 TSW CA-E 34PH MT24 TSW CA-G 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H PIM0 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F 34PH MT24 TSW CA-D 34PH MT24 TSW CA-F 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H (b) Relationship between the cable connection and the time slot: Trunk data for SDT is assigned to an odd-number Module Group. The module group is determined by the connection of the 34PH MT24 TSW CA-x cable as shown in the table below. Table 3-5 Relationship between Cable Connection and Time Slot MODULE GROUP Assigned for SDT TIME SLOTS Assigned for SDT PIM2 of IMG0 MG01 PIM3 of IMG0 PIM2 of IMG1 MG03 PIM3 of IMG1 PIM2 of IMG2 MG05 PIM3 of IMG2 PIM2 of IMG3 MG07 PIM3 of IMG3 CABLE CONNECTIONS FROM (Connectors on PA-SDTB) MUX0A TO (Connectors on BWB of TSWM) MUX002 MUX1A MUX102 MUX0B MUX003 MUX1B MUX103 MUX0A MUX012 MUX1A MUX112 MUX0B MUX013 MUX1B MUX113 MUX0A MUX022 MUX1A MUX122 MUX0B MUX023 MUX1B MUX123 MUX0A MUX032 MUX1A MUX132 MUX0B MUX033 MUX1B MUX133 REMARKS In this case, PIM2 and PIM3 of IMG0 are not actually mounted; However, AUNT data for PIM2/PIM3 is required. In this case, PIM2 and PIM3 of IMG1 are not actually mounted; However, AUNT data for PIM2/PIM3 is required. In this case, PIM2 and PIM3 of IMG2 are not actually mounted; However, AUNT data for PIM2/PIM3 is required. In this case, PIM2 and PIM3 of IMG3 are not actually mounted; However, AUNT data for PIM2/PIM3 is required. Note 1: MUX1x on PA-SDTB and MUX1xx on BWB of TSWM are used when the system is a dual configuration. Note 2: When half of the time slots are used in a module group, time slots for PIM2 must be used. However, the remaining time slots (for PIM3) cannot be used for other circuit cards. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 319 Revision 4.0 PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk Example: When the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB circuit cards are mounted in PIM3 of IMG0, and MG07 (PIM2 and PIM3 of IMG3) is assigned for the SDT interface, the type of cable and connector locations are as shown in the following figure. The mounting location of PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB circuit card has no relationship to the time slots assigned for the SDT interface so the PA-SDTA and PA-SDTB circuit cards can be mounted in any PIM. PA-SDTB PIM3 MUX0A MUX1A MUX0B MUX1B PIM 3 PIM 3 PIM 3 PIM 3 PIM 2 PIM 2 PIM 2 PIM 2 PIM 1 PIM 1 PIM 1 PIM 1 PIM 0 PIM 0 PIM 0 PIM 0 LPM TSWM Dummy Dummy IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3 Time slots assigned for SDT (MG07). PIM2 and PIM3 of IMG3 are not actually mounted. 34PH MT24 TSW CA-H (Refer to Table 3-3.) To MUX133 To MUX033 To MUX132 To MUX032 BWB of TSWM Connect the cables according to the time slots assigned for SDT. (Refer to Table 3-5 and Figure 3-85.) Figure 3-84 Example of Cable Connection for 4-IMG System CHAPTER 3 Page 320 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk MUXxxx Connectors for SDT MUX022 MUX002 MUX023 MUX032 MUX003 MUX033 MUX102 MUX012 MUX103 MUX112 MUX013 MUX113 MUX122 MUX132 MUX123 MUX133 Figure 3-85 Location of MUXxxx Connectors for SDT ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 321 Revision 4.0 PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk Receiver Sensitivity (dBm) (c) Length of Fiber Optic Cable The maximum length of the fiber optic cable is approximately 15 kilometers (9.3 miles). Figure 3-86 shows the level diagram of the fiber optic interface. 0.00 -5.00 Maximum Receiver Sensitivity : -8.00 dBm -10.00 : Best Case : Worst Case : Maximum Receiver Sensitivity : Minimum Receiver Sensitivity -15.00 -20.00 -25.00 -30.00 Minimum Receiver Sensitivity : -31.00 dBm -35.00 0.00 2.00 1.20 4.00 2.40 6.00 3.70 8.00 4.40 10.00 6.20 12.00 14.00 7.40 8.60 16.00 18.00 9.90 11.00 20.00 (km) 12.00 (miles) Cable Length Figure 3-86 Level Diagram Level margin in the case of 15 kilometers (9.3 miles) is shown in Table 3-6. Table 3-6 Level Margin Note: CONDITION LEVEL MARGIN Worst case 4.0 dB Best case 11.0 dB Maximum cable length varies depending on the type of cable and the number of connection points. CHAPTER 3 Page 322 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-SDTA SDH/SONET Digital Trunk 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE REMARKS ON MB SW11 SW12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 ON ON ON P-SW ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 323 Revision 4.0 PA-SDTB SDH/SONET Digital Trunk PA-SDTB SDH/SONET Digital Trunk 1. General Function The PA-SDTA circuit card provides a maximum of 28 interface (1.5 Mbps) used with the fiber optic cable. This card also has the MUX function and is connected directly to the TSW card. This card is used with the PA-SDTA card. Fusion Link with FCCH Fusion Node-A Node-B Fiber Optic Cable SDTA FCH S D T B Connection Link (Data Link) + Connection Trunk (Speech Path) SDTA Fiber Optic Cable SDTA FCH S D T B SDTA For Dual Configuration Internal LAN Internal LAN Fusion Link without FCCH Fusion Node-A Node-B Fiber Optic Cable SDTA S D T B Connection Trunk (Speech Path) SDTA Fiber Optic Cable SDTA S D T B SDTA For Dual Configuration Internal LAN SDH/SONET Digital Trunk * ) SDT: FCH: Fusion Call Control Handler Figure 3-87 Location of PA-SDTB (SDT) Card in the System CHAPTER 3 Page 324 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-SDTB SDH/SONET Digital Trunk 2. Mounting Location/Condition This circuit card can be mounted in any universal slots. Mounting Module PIM 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Universal Slots Universal Slots Mounting conditions are shown below. • Only the power is supplied from Back Wiring Board (BWB). • This card is connected to the PA-SDTA card using the following front cables. • For single configuration: SDT CABLEB• For dual configuration: SDT CABLEA• This card is connected to the TSW card. • Time slots used for this circuit card are determined by the cable connection between the PA-SDTB and TSW. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 325 Revision 4.0 PA-SDTB SDH/SONET Digital Trunk 3. Face Layout of Lamps, Switches, and Connectors The face layout of lamps, switches, and connectors are shown in Figure 3-88. OPE MB 2MALA 2MALB 32MALA 32MALB ACT0 ACT1 SYC0A SYC1A SYC0B SYC1B PCM I/O MUX0A MUX1A MUX0B MUX1B Figure 3-88 Face Layout of PA-SDTB (SDT) CHAPTER 3 Page 326 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E) PA-SDTB SDH/SONET Digital Trunk 4. Lamp Indications Lamp indications for this circuit card are shown in the table below: LAMP NAME COLOR Green STATE Remains lit when this circuit card is in operation. OPE Red Remains lit when this circuit card is in non-operation. 2MALA Red Lights when 2 M clock and FH from A-side MUX is abnormal. 2MALB Red Lights when 2 M clock and FH from B-side MUX is abnormal. 32MALA Red Lights when 32 M clock from A-side MUX is abnormal. 32MALB Red Lights when 32 M clock from B-side MUX is abnormal. Green Remains lit when MUX#0 is operating normally. ACT0 Off Green Remains off when MUX#0 is in stand-by state. Remains lit when MUX#1 is operating normally. ACT1 Off Green Remains off when MUX#1 is in stand-by state. Lights when MUX#0 synchronization with TSW is established in A-side. SYC0A Off Green Goes off when the synchronization is not established. Lights when MUX#1 synchronization with TSW is established in A-side. SYC1A Off Green Goes off when the synchronization is not established. Lights when MUX#0 synchronization with TSW is established in B-side. SYC0B Off Green Goes off when the synchronization is not established. Lights when MUX#1 synchronization with TSW is established in B-side. SYC1B Off Note: Goes off when the synchronization is not established. A-side MUX means the card located in UNIT0/1 and B-side MUX means the card located in UNIT 2/3. ND-70182 (E) CHAPTER 3 Page 327 Revision 4.0 PA-SDTB SDH/SONET Digital Trunk 5. Switch Settings Switch settings for this circuit card are shown in the table below: SWITCH NAME STANDARD SETTING SETTING UP Circuit card Make-busy MB × DOWN 6. MEANING Circuit card Make-busy cancel External Interface Refer to the PA-SDTA circuit card. 7. Switch Setting Sheet SWITCH NAME SWITCH SHAPE ON MB CHAPTER 3 Page 328 Revision 4.0 ND-70182 (E)
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.4 Linearized : No Page Count : 343 Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Layout : SinglePage Creation Date : 2000:05:25 09:39:01Z Producer : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows Author : EZ Manuals Mod Date : 2002:01:30 08:58:15-06:00 Create Date : 2000:05:25 09:39:01Z Modify Date : 2002:01:30 08:58:15-06:00 Metadata Date : 2002:01:30 08:58:15-06:00 Creator : EZ Manuals Title : NEAX2400 IMX Circuit Card ManualEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools